GE Medical Systems

Technical
Publications

Service Manual SM A0654E

Revision 3-1684

AMX-IT X-Ray
Unit

Product

Operating Documentation
 DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is
apparent, have notation of “bad order” placed by the delivering driver on
ail copies of the freight or express bill. If damage is of a concealed nature,
notify transportation agent as soon as possible to make an “inspection report
of damage” but in any event not later than 15 days after delivery. A trans-
portation company usually will not pay a claim for concealed damage if an
inspection is not requested within this 15 day period. Complete instructions
regarding claim procedure are found in section ‘’$’’ of the Policy & Proce-
dure Bulletins.

If shipment was handled by moving van service - uncrated - call Traffic -

Milwaukee immediately when any damage is found. Do not attempt to call
any local agent. At this time be ready to describe type of damage, type of
equipment, serial numbers and if possible the order number.

The above paragraph is in regard to equipment requiring installation only,

and does not apply to supply items. The F.0.B. point for these items is as
shown in the Price Book.

GE Medical Systems

GE Medical Systems: | Telex 3797371

20 Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 USA
(Asia, Pacific, latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems—Europe: Telex 261794
Shortlands, Hammersmith, London WE SEX UK
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 SM A0654E

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 es OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

OM A0654E
CHAPTER2 .......................... DOES NOT APPLY
CHAPTER 3 .......................... INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 4 ......................... ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION
CHAPTER5 .......................... FUNCTIONAL CHECK
CHAPTER 6 .......................... THEORY AND SERVICE
СНАРТЕВ 7 ............. —— _ SCHEMATICS
CHAPTER8 ......................... PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 9 ......................... RENEWAL PARTS
 GE Medical Systems

Technical
Publications

OPERATING MANUAL
OM A0654E
3-1684

АМХ-П
X-Ray Unit

Product

Operating Documentation
OPERATING MANUAL
OM A0654E
3-1684

AMX-II
X-Ray Unit

IMPORTANT!... X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly precautions to prevent the possi- quate steps to insure protection
used may cause injury. Accord- bility of any persons carelessly, against injury.
ingly, the instructions herein con- unwisely, or unknowingly expos-
tained should be thoroughly read ing themselves or others to All persons authorized to use the
and understood before you radiation. equipment must be cognizant of
attempt to place this equipment the danger of excessive exposure
in operation. The General Electric to x-radiation and the equipment
it is important that everyone hav-
Company, Medical Systems is sold with the understanding
ing anything to do with x-radia-
Group, will be glad to assist and that the General Electric Com-
tion be properly trained and fuily
cooperate in placing this equip- pany, Medical Systems Group, its
acquainted with the recommen-
ment in use. agents, and representatives have
dations of the National Council
Although this apparatus incor- on Radiation Protection and Mea- no responsibility for injury or
porates a high degree of pro- surements as published in NCRP damage which may result from
tection against x-radiation other Reports available from NCRP exposure to x-radiation.
than the useful beam, no prac- Publications, 7910 Woodmont
tical design of equipment can Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Various protective material and
provide complete protection. Nor Maryland 20814, and of the Inter- devices are available. It is urged
can any practical design compel national Commission on Radia- that such materials or devices be
the operator to take adequate tion Protection, and take ade- used.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 OM A0654E

VERTICAL
COLUMN

X-RAY TUBE UNIT

HV CABLES
SENTRY COLLIMATOR
TELESCOPING
ARM

X-RAY CONTROL
ACCESS COVER

CASSETTE
TRAY

SAFETY
BUMPER

23561-P
10

AMX-II X-RAY WITH

TUBE UNIT AND SENTRY COLLIMATOR

ILLUSTRATION 1-1
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

AMX-11 X-RAY UNIT

FOREWORD

The AMX-II X-Ray Unit consists of a full wave 500 Hz single phase x-ray generator control and transformer,
rechargeable battery, tube support column with x-ray tube unit and collimator, all mounted on a self-
propelled mobile base.

Operation of the AMX-Il X-Ray Unit consists of driving the mobile unit, positioning and making an x-ray
exposure, and recharging the battery. An understanding of the specific operative steps and various switch,
signaling, and lockout devices is essential. Therefore, these directions should be read carefully and thorough-
ly understood before attempting to operate the AMX-il X-Ray Unit.

COMPONENT MODEL NUMBERS NAMEPLATE LOCATIONS

Basic Unit, Control

Mobile Base, Support Column
115V 50/60 Hz 46-165600G
10, G12, G14, Beneath exposure control
G15 Handswitch bracket on
front of unit.

230V 50/60 Hz 46-165600G11

X-Ray Tube Unit 46-155750G2, G3, G4 Cathode trim cap housing

Rear Trim Cover

Collimator 46-177399G1-G2 or Bottom - Rear of

46-194759G1 Trim Cover

HV Transformer 46-150625G1 On side of transformer

beneath terminal strip

Battery (cell group) 46-152812P1 End of cell group case

Extension Cylinder (optional) 46-138573G1 On body of cylinder

WARNING

Explosion Hazard - Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics. This X-ray equipment is
dangerous to both patient and operator unless safe exposure factors are observed. Sold only to be used
by or on the prescription of a licensed physician.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
RADIATION: Always consider providing radiation protection for your patient and yourself when
operating the AMX-II.

GOOD OPERATING PRACTICES

© Wear a lead apron while operating the x-ray controls of the AMX-II.
e Step back at least 6 ft. (1.8m) from the AMX-II or to the full extension of the
handswitch cord before making an exposure.
e Always use the proper field sizes and technic factors for each procedure to minimize
x-ray exposure and produce the best diagnostic results.
© When x-raying bed patients, move them as far as possible from nearby beds.
e Ask visitors to step outside the room during an exposure.
e Use gonadal shields for patients whenever possible.
EXPOSURE PROFILE
Illustration 1-1A shows the iso-exposure profile of the AMX-II. This profile shows
the typical scattered radiation levels around an AMX-H using chest radiography
technics.

NOTE: This profile is only an indication of typical scattered radiation levels.

Variations in equipment performance, patient size, technic, geometry, and
radiation measuring devices may cause the profile to vary slightly from the
one shown here.

0.1 mR/exposure

1.0 mR/exposure

Contours are at eye level for a 5 ft. 8 inch (1.73m)

person
Bone and tissue equivalent rubber phantom
80 kVp, 5 mAs
0-5 mR /exposure 40 în. SID, 14 x 17 in. field
> A κ SCALE
X x

33121-010 0.5 1.0 Ft

AMX-II ISO-EXPOSURE PROFILE

ILLUSTRATION 1-1A
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

Under most conditions, cumulative radiation dose to the operator will not exceed recommended maximum
permissible levels. However, as with all radiation-producing devices, a gualified radiation expert should
evaluate situations involving frequent exposures using high kVp and mAs technics to determine if extra
protective devices are necessary.
/
NOTE: Recommended maximum permissible dose to the eyes is 100 mrem/week (NCRP no. 39, p. 89),
where a dose of 1 mrem is produced by an exposure to 1 mR of x-radiation.

An audible tone and/or red X-RAY light indicates presence of radiation. If

either indicator is on at any time other than during the expected X-RAY
exposure interval, immediately release the handswitch ROTOR and/or X-RAY
button and turn off main circuit breaker. Do not energize the unit again
until it has been checked by a qualified x-ray serviceman.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK This unit contains a 120 volt rechargeable battery inside the cabinet. It can
WARNING: cause electrical shock even when the unit is not connected to a power outlet.

"The x-ray control access door, shown in Illustration 1-1, can be opened only
by removing the cover. Because of the possible electrical shock and other
hazards present when this cover is removed, it should be removed only by a
trained x-ray serviceman when the unit requires servicing.

Unauthorized persons should not remove the cassette tray shown in

Illustration 1-1.
BATTERY
WARNING: The cassette tray should not be removed except by or in the presence of a
person thoroughly familiar with safe nickel-cadmium battery service pro-
cedures given in Chapter 8 of the AMX-II X-Ray Unit Service Manual.

Should a metallic object come in contact with the battery terminals, a small
one would vaporize and a large one would become very hot. If the object is,
for example, a ring or a wrist watch, it may weld to a terminal and the wearer
could be severely burned or injured by moiten metal.

The Electrolyte used in nickel-cadmium batteries is a caustic solution of

potassium hydroxide. Serious burns will result if it comes in contact with
any part of the body.

If Electrolyte gets on the skin, wash the affected areas with large quantities
of water; then neutralize skin with vinegar, lemon juice, or 3% acetic acid.

If Electrolyte gets into the eyes, flush with water and GET IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION.

When recharging the battery, the x-ray unit must be located in a large ventila-
ted room. During normal charging conditions and when all batteries are func-
tioning properly, there is little or no gas emitted. Should abnormal conditions
develop, there could be an accumulation of hydrogen gas which if confined in
a small space would be explosive in the presence of a flame or electrical spark.
Whenever the batteries are being charged, a fan ventilates the battery compart-
ment. A hazardous situation will not develop where the overflow from this
compartment is into a large room or a well ventilated small room.

3
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

UNIT ON CHARGE ON CHARGE

LAMP LAMP COMPLETE
LAMP
BATTERY
CONDITION
INDICATOR
KEYED X-RAY METER
GENERATOR
STANDBY BATTERY
SWITCH VOLTAGE
COMPENSATOR
KVP SELECTOR
SWITCH MAS SELECTOR
SWITCH

“> X-RAY ON LAMP

READY LAMP = ~ — MAIN POWER
hs circuit
DIRECTION ee na BREAKER
SELECTOR ーー パテ ーー
с e UT BRAKE
SWITCH \ 一 HANDLE
га
DRIVE
ASSIST о y — SPEED
BUTTON ILLUSTRATION 1-2 23563210 CONTROL
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The MAIN POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER disconnects the Battery. It must be ON in order to charge the
unit, drive it from one location to another, and make exposures.

The keyed X-RAY GENERATOR STANDBY SWITCH is turned to OFF when the AMX-II is being driven
or is not in use, to ON for exposures, and to CHARGE when charging the batteries. A key is provided for
this switch to assure that only authorized personnel operate the unit. The key should be taken out of the
socket and retained by the designated operator immediately after a scheduled period of x-ray operation.

The BATTERY CHARGER recharges the internal battery from any 115v or 230v, 50-60 Hz power outlet
receptacle. The unit may not be driven or an x-ray exposure cannot be made when the battery charger
plug is in a power outlet receptacle.

The x-ray unit battery should be charged (as described under OPERATION) whenever the BATTERY
CONDITION needle enters the red band. It should be allowed to charge until the amber CHARGE COM-
PLETE lamp giows, and the BATTERY CONDITION indicator needle is in the green band. Typically,
the battery will charge from too low (red band) to full charge in less than 10 hours. Since the charger is
self-regulating, it is permissible to have it connected to power indefinitely.

CAUTION: ALWAYS LOCATE THE UNIT IN A WELL VENTILATED ROOM WHEN CHARGING IT.
The SPEED CONTROL will vary the speed of the unit in forward or reverse. When released, it will return
to the zero speed position.

The SAFETY BUMPER, located on the front of the unit, will disconnect the drive motor and stop the unit
upon impact with any object.

The DRIVE ASSIST BUTTON, when pressed, will increase the low speed torque of the drive motor. It is
a spring loaded button which should be used when climbing an incline or when moving over the edge of
carpeting or other small floor discontinuities.
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS АМХ-И X-RAY UNIT
1-981 | OM A0654E

COLUMN

EXPOSURE
CONTROL
HAN DSWITCH

BATTERY
CHARGER
CORD &
PLUG

ILLUSTRATION
1-3. 23564P10
The BRAKE HANDLE is used to steer the unit, and automatically engages the brakes and disconnects the
drive motor when released.

The BATTERY VOLTAGE COMPENSATOR SWITCH adjusts for variations in battery charge. When the
battery meter is in the HIGH region, the switch should be in the HIGH position. As the battery charge is
reduced to the LOW region, the switch should be in the LOW position. After battery charging is completed,
allow the following condition for at least 15 minutes before making exposures: Keep the MAIN POWER
BREAKER at ON. If the line cord is left connected, set the KEY SWITCH at CHARGE. However, if the
line cord is disconnected, set the KEY SWITCH at ON.

The Remote Exposure Contro! Handswitch (Illustration 1-3) has ROTOR and X-RAY buttons. Provided
that the red UNIT ON fight is glowing, depressing the rotor button will cause x-ray tube anode rotation
and filament preheating. There will be a 2.5 second delay for these functions to reach the operating point.
After that delay, the white READY lamp will glow. Then the x-ray exposure will occur immediately after
the handswitch X-RAY button is depressed.

If the ROTOR and X-RAY buttons are depressed simultaneously, the x-ray exposure will occur after the
2.5 second delay and as the READY lamp flashes on.

In order to obtain an exposure, the MAIN POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER must be ON, the X-RAY
GENERATOR STANDBY SWITCH must be ON, and the charger cord disconnected from the power outlet.

Glow of the red X-RAY lamp indicates that x-rays are being emitted. When the READY lamp is glowing,
the X-RAY lamp will glow immediately after the handswitch X-RAY button is depressed and it will remain

5
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS | | | AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E
ARM
INTERLOCK TELESCOPING YOKE ROTATION TUBE UNIT
COLUMN BUTTON ARM LOCK ROTATION LOCK

X-RAY
. TUBE
UNIT

LATCH
BAR

A o

23565-P 10
VERTICAL LATCH
ILLUSTRATION 1-4 ARM TELESCOPING YOKE COLLIMATOR
LOCK ARM LOCK
on for the time interval equal to the MAS selected divided by 100. All exposures with the AMX I! will be
at 100 milliamperes. Therefore, exposure time may be determined by dividing the MAS selection by 100.
For example, if 300 MAS is selected, the lamp will glow for three seconds or if 2.0 MAS is selected it will
glow for 0.02 seconds.

During the time that the X-Ray lamp glows, there will also be an audible tone signal to indicate that x-rays
are being produced. At the low MAS selections, this signal will be a short beep. For longer exposures there
will be a sustained tone.

WARNING: | If either the X-RAY lamp glow or the tone signal continues longer than 3 seconds under any
circumstances, immediately release handswitch ROTOR and X-RAY buttons and turn the
main power circuit breaker OFF.

In such a case, another exposure should not be attempted until the unit has been examined by a qualified
x-ray serviceman.

The Vertical Column supports the telescoping arm, x-ray tube unit and collimator. It rotates in a bearing
structure in the base of the unit.
To rotate the vertical column, move the telescoping arm to the desired position. 360° of movement
is possible. A friction brake holds the vertical column in place. If the column drifts after positioning,
call for service.
The VERTICAL ARM LOCK, Illustration 1-4, will secure the telescoping arm in any position. If the arm
drifts when the lock is released, call for service. If the counterbalance system should fail, a safety device.
locks the arm in position, and the unit must be serviced before it can be used again.

6
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

ADDITIONAL E
1 and 2 MM A κ ENS mm ” n ROTATIONAL DETENT
ALUMINUM 1 Ču m PLUNGER KNOB
SELECTIVE (ON RIGHT HAND SIDE)
FILTERS
`` CALIBRATED SCALE
DRUM

[~~
FIELD LIGHT BUTTON
|i
i

[OX BLADE CONTROL

KNOBS

TRACKS FOR

一 E X T E N SION CYLINDER
一 一 ———— MEASURING TAPE
y=
16942-P10
ILLUSTRATION 1-5

The Telescoping Arm consists of two movable sections and one stationary section. The sections extend and
retract equally as the arm is repositioned.

The TELESCOPING ARM LOCK, located beneath the middle section, will secure the telescoping arm in
any position.

The YOKE ROTATION LOCK allows the tube to be rotated +/-180° about the horizontal axis and locked
in any position.

The ARM INTERLOCK BUTTON will maintain the telescoping arm in the maximum retracted position.

When driving the AMX-!| from room to room, the telescoping arm is secured by means of the LATCH
and LATCH BAR. The telescoping arm must be in the position shown in Illustration 1-1. The LATCH at
the bottom of the telescoping arm automatically latches to the LATCH BAR when they are joined. To
release, rotate the latch clockwise and raise the telescoping arm.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

The yoke supporting the Tube Unit can be rotated 180 degrees about the horizontal axis in either direction
of the central position (x-ray port pointing straight downward). It can be positively retained in any inter-
mediate position by the YOKE ROTATION LOCK.

The TUBE UNIT ROTATION LOCK, located on the yoke clamp, locks or releases the Tube Unit for
rotation in the yoke clamps toward or away from the column. Two index lines, one on the Tube Unit and
one on the yoke clamp, may be used to place the central x-ray beam axis in the vertical plane.

The X-Ray Tube Unit is an HRT - O9N with a 1.0 mm focal spot.

The Sentry Manuai Collimator is used with the AMX-!| X-Ray Unit. The collimator limits patient rad-
iation exposure to a desired area at a given distance from the x-ray tube focal spot.

Minimum Source-to-Skin distance is limited to more than 30 centimeters by the tracks on the bottom of
the collimator for mounting the accessory Extension Cylinder.

Area of coverage is indicated by light from a GE Quartz!ine® high-intensity lamp. Distinct shadow cross
hairs, which indicate the field center, aid in accurate radiographic positioning.

The collimator has a fixed minimum filtration equivalent to 1.5mm of aluminum measured at 150 kvp, so
that a total filtration of 2.5mm of aluminum equivalent results from the tube-coilimator combination. By
inserting the 1mm and/or 2mm filter in the slot on the left side of the collimator, additional selective
filtration of 1, 2, or 3mm of aluminum equivalent may be obtained.

Dial numbers on the Calibrated Scale Drum, Illustration 1-5, are for 40, 48, 60, and 72 inch source-to-
image distances and standard film sizes of 5 through 17 inches (13 cm through 43 cm). To select the scale
for one of the four source-to-image distances, rotate the drum by turning the SCALE SELECTION KNOB
until the desired detent position is reached. Two moving pointers sweep across the scale upon actuation of
the BLADE CONTROL KNOBS permitting easy selection of the field size. The upper pointer indicates
the transverse dimension while the lower pointer indicates the longitudinal dimension.

Independent adjustment is provided by the BLADE CONTROL KNOBS on the face of the collimator.
They allow collimating to any desired rectangular field size up to 17” x 17” (43 cm x 43 cm) at a 40”
source-to-image distance. The right-hand knob controls the transverse dimension, while the left-hand knob:
controls the longitudinal dimension, while the left-hand knob controls the longitudinal dimension.

Depressing the FIELD LITE BUTTON energizes the high-intensity lamp. A timer automatically
switches the light off in approximately 15 to 20 seconds to keep lamp operation at a minimum. This time
interval can be adjusted by the serviceman if the user so desires.

NOTE: An interlock allows exposures and turns off the field light when x-ray rotor handswitch is en-
ergized.

The collimator can be rotated and locked positively at 0°, +/- 159, +/-45°, and +/- 90° from the front
position by detent. Depress the ROTATIONAL DETENT PLUNGER KNOB on the right side of the
collimator to move it from a detent position. Keep the plunger knob depressed until the approximate
position desired is reached. Then release the button and rotate the collimator slightly about this position
until the lock snaps in place.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 . OM A0654E

A Measuring Tape is provided on the center line of the bottom of the collimator housing. It is calibrated in
inches and centimeters for measuring source-to-image distances. The correct source-to-image distance is
indicated by having the bottom of the collimator housing even with the marking on the tape which
corresponds to the desired source-to-image distance. For accurate measurements, have the tape tab on
the end of the tape straight down, not perpendicular to the tape.

Parallel tracks on the bottom of the collimator housing accept an optional extension cylinder. Slide the
extension cylinder into the tracks from the front of the collimator until the cylinder latch snaps into the
slot on the right track. Press the latch to release the cylinder for removal. The added weight of the extension
cylinder will affect the counterbalance of the vertical column. Lock the vertical arm when installing or
removing the extension cylinder and apply extra caution when positioning the unit with the extension
cylinder installed.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

OPERATION
Before operating the unit read the Warning on page 1 and the Safety Precautions on page 2.
Driving the Mobile Unit
1. Loosen the Telescoping Arm Lock and withdraw the arm until the interlock button is heard to click.
Tighten the Telescoping Arm Lock.
Remove the Extension Cylinder, if used.

Rotate the column until the arm is facing the operator.

Loosen the Vertical Arm Lock and slowly lower the arm until the latch and latch bar are seen to
engage. Secure the Carriage Lock.
5. Check that the Yoke Rotation Lock and Tube Rotation Lock are secure.
6. Be sure the charger cable plug is removed from a power outlet and retracted.
CAUTION: WHEN DRIVING THE UNIT THROUGH DOORS, BE SURE TO PARK THE TUBE UNIT
AS SHOWN ON ILLUSTRATION 1-1 TO PREVENT STRIKING DOOR CASINGS AND
DAMAGING THE TELESCOPING ARM.
Turn the Main Circuit Breaker to ON.
Move the Direction Switch to FORWARD or REVERSE as desired.
Depress the Brake Handle.

10. Rotate the Speed Control toward the x-ray control to increase speed.
11. Steer the unit with the Brake Handle.
12. To aid in climbing ramps or moving the unit onto thick carpeting, press the Drive Assist Button with
the left thumb while keeping the Brake Handle depressed.
CAUTION: DRIVE ASSIST OPERATION IS NOT RECOMMENDED WHILE POSITIONING THE
UNIT FOR RADIOGRAPHS OR WHILE MANEUVERING THE UNIT THROUGH
DOORWAYS OR CONGESTED CORRIDORS.
13. If the Bumper contacts any object when moving forward, the unit will stop. To regain drive control,
the unit must be manually pushed back.
CAUTION: DO NOT DEPRESS THE BRAKE HANDLE WHEN THE SPEED CONTROL IS SET TO
FULL SPEED. ALWAYS START AT ZERO SPEED.
Positioning and Making an Exposure
This operative procedure presupposes that preliminary steps have been completed. These inciude position-
ing the patient, placing the cassette in position, selecting KVP, MAS, etc.
1. Check that charger cable plug is removed from the power outlet.
2. Release the LATCH and raise the telescoping arm.
3. Rotate the column so the arm points in the desired position.
4 Loosen the Telescoping Arm Lock, push the interlock button, extend the arm and lock it into
position.
5. Adjust the Telescoping Arm to the desired source-to-image distance. Use the measuring tape in the
collimator.

10
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

NOTE: As an aid in positioning the unit, it may be driven with Telescoping Arm unlatched from
the Latch Bar. Use of the Drive Assist Button is not recommended with the Telescoping
Arm unlatched.

6. Turn the keyed X-Ray Generator Standby Switch to the ON position. The UNIT ON light will glow
red. The BATTERY CONDITION indicator needle must swing into the green band. If it does not,
the batteries must be recharged. Check to see that the battery voltage compensator switch is in the
position indicated by the battery condition indicator.

7. Rotate the collimator until the crosshairs from the Field Light align in the desired position.

8 Collimate to the desired film size with the Field Light.

9. Depress the handswitch ROTOR button. There will be a 2.5 second delay before the white READY
light will glow.

소소 10. After ready lite glows, depress the handswitch X-Ray button. An audible tone signal will sound and
the red X-RAY light will glow during the time that x-rays are emitted.

WARNING: IF EITHER THE LAMP GLOWS OR THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL CONTINUES FOR MORE
THAN 3 SECONDS, RELEASE THE ROTOR AND X-RAY BUTTONS AND TURN THE
MAIN POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF. IN THIS CASE, DO NOT ATTEMPT AN-
OTHER EXPOSURE UNTIL THE UNIT HAS BEEN CHECKED BY A QUALIFIED
SERVICEMAN.

11. Check the Battery Condition Meter between exposures. If the meter reads in the red region after one
minute rest; the batteries must be recharged as described below.

12. Turn the X-RAY Generator Standby switch to OFF when completed.

13. The unit may be driven to a new location. Prepare the unit for transport as described previously.
Only the MAIN POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER should be ON while driving.

Recharging the Battery

Battery recharging is required only when the BATTERY CONDITION METER reads in the RED band
after a one minute rest. Charging is recommended only when the battery condition meter indicates a need.
The battery should not be routinely charged between patients. When charging is necessary, the battery is
automatically protected from overcharging.

1. With the unit prepared for transport as described previously, drive the entire mobile unit to within
15" of a 115 or 230V, 50-60 Hz power outlet in a ventilated area. Check that the power outlet
matches the nameplate rating of the basic unit. The nameplate is located beneath the exposure hand-
switch bracket.

CAUTION: ALWAYS LOCATE THE UNIT IN A WELL VENTILATED ROOM WHEN RECHARG-
ING THE BATTERY.
Move the Main Power Circuit Breaker to ON. Insert the extension cord into the power outlet. The
cord is stored on a reel inside the mobile unit cabinet. Upon pull and slow release, the cord remains
extended the desired length.

Turn the Standby Switch to CHARGE. The BATTERY CONDITION indicator needle will swing to-
ward the green band and the fan will run. The CHARGE ON lamp will glow red. The battery is now
charging.

11
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

4. The BATTERY CONDITION indicator will show battery charge level. When the white CHARGE
COMPLETE Lamp comes on the battery charge has been completed. The unit may be left with the
charger connected without damage to the equipment.

5. To disconnect the charger, turn the Standby Switch and the Main Power Circuit Breaker to OFF.
Remove the plug from the power outlet. Pull the extension cord and release it quickly. The take-up
reel will coil the cord into the cabinet.

6. Allowa minimum interval of 15 minutes after charge completion, with key switch in “ON” or
“CHARGE” position and main power circuit breaker “ON”, before making an exposure.

12
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 OM A0654E

RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Power Requirements
Power for this unit is obtained from a rechargeable 120 v battery housed inside the mobile base cabinet.

Capacity of the battery when fully charged is approximately 10,000 MAS at 100 KVP. However, actual
MAS capacity will depend on battery condition, use of collimator lamp, time rotor is held on, and dis-
tance motor drive is used.
Power requirements for recharging the battery: 110 to 120VAC 50/60 Hz 6.0 Amps
210 to 240VAC 50/60 Hz 3.0 Amps

Battery Charge

The minimum battery charge for operation of the unit is that the Battery Condition Meter read in either
of the two green bands prior to the initiation of the x-ray exposure.

Motor Drive Ratings

The AMX-11 may be driven at speeds up to a maximum of 180 feet per minute (54.9 meter per minute)
on a smooth, hard surfaced, level floor. Attainable speed will be reduced by inclines, carpeted, or soft
surfaced floors. The Drive Assist feature primarily increases the low speed torque and has little effect on
maximum speed. With Drive Assist the unit is capable of climbing a 6 degree incline on a tiled or similar
surface. Battery drain varies according to the speed, distance, type of surface, and incline.

X-Ray Generator Ratings and Duty Cycle.

Maximum Ratings
All radiographic exposures with this unit are at 100 milliamperes.
KVP (MAXIMUM) MAS (MAXIMUM)
110 200
100 250
50 to 90 300

All ratings and duty cycles are subject to limitations of the x-ray tube rating and apply at altitudes up to
8000 feet, (24.38 kilo meters) average relative humidity not exceeding 80%, and ambient temperature
between 60°F (15.69C) and 100°F (37.8°C).

13
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS o AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

Technic Factor Deviations

The maximum deviation from the selected setting during radiographic exposure is as follows:

SELECTION AND ACCURACY AS STATED

RANGE IN (MEDIAN*) + VARIATION**
MAS
1 MAS (+/- 40% + .35MAS) +/- .27 MAS
1.5 MAS (+/- 33% + .30MAS) +/- .27 MAS
2 MAS | (+/- 21% + .32 MAS) +/- .28 MAS
2.5 MAS to 4 MAS (+/ 14% + .39 MAS) +/- .30 MAS
5 MAS to 8 MAS (+/- 8% + .40 MAS) +/- .32 MAS
10 MAS (+/- 7% + .40 MAS) +/- .32 MAS
12 MAS to 300 MAS -7% to +10%
* Represents the range of possible median
values for any given machine.

**Represents the range of possible variation

between exposures at fixed technic for any
given machine.

KVP
50 KVP to 110 KVP (+ (10 KVP +7%))
(-(5 KVP + 7%)) of dial reading after
first 20 milliseconds of exposure

50 KVP to 95 KVP (+ (20 KVP +7%))

'(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial reading during
first 20 milliseconds of exposure.

100 KVP to 110 KVP (+ (25 KVP +7%))

(-(5 KVP + 7%)) of dial reading during
first 20 milliseconds of exposure.

Conditions required to achieve the above accuracies:

1. The Battery Condition Meter must be in either of the two green bands.

2. Allow a minimum interval of 15 minutes after charge completion with key switch in “ON” or
“CHARGE” position, and main power circuit breaker “ON”, before making an exposure.

14
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E

Measurement Criteria:

Kilovoltage: Generated high voltages at anode and cathode are reduced by a precision voltage divider,
Catalog C1515A. Resulting peak values are observed on a calibrated dual channel oscilloscope using alge-
braic addition. For procedure, see Chapter 5 of Service Manual SM A0654E.

MAS is within stated accuracy when:

1. The tube current (MA), measured with a DC milliameter (1% accuracy) inserted into the tube
current line, is adjusted to within accuracies described in Chapter 4 of Service Manual SM A0654E.

2. Time, measured as the duration of the peak kilovoltage applied to the x-ray tube using the voltage
divider and oscilloscope for kilovoltage measurement, is adjusted to within accuracies described in
Chapter 4 of Service Manual SM A0654E.

MAS can be measured directly with a DC MAS Meter (Fluke 8000A/W MAS option or equivalent) inserted
into the tube current line as described in Chapter 4 of Service Manual SM A0654E.

Tube Unit Ratings

The tube unit meets federal regulations of leakage radiation when operated continuously at leakage technic
factors of 130 kvp, 1.5 ma.

Minimum inherent filtration of the tube unit is 1.0 mm Aluminum equivalent, measured at 130 kvp.

The tube ratings for this unit are given in the Rating Chart that follows. They are based on operation with a
1-mm focal spot, 15 degree target angle, 3400 RPM, at 500 Hz, the frequency at which the AMX-II oper-
ates. When calculating heat input to the anode or tube unit, use the following:
HEAT UNITS = KVP x MAS x 1.35

HRT TUBE RATINGS

FOR AMX-II

MAX. TIME MIN. INTERVAL

KVP MA (SECONDS) BETWEEN EXPO.

50 100 15 6.5 Min.

60 100 12 6.5 Min.
70 100 9.5 5,5 Min.
80 100 7 4.0 Min.
90 100 5 3.0 Min.
100 100 4 2.5 Min.
110 100 3 2.0 Min.
120 100 2.5 2.0 Min.
125 100 2.5 2.0 Min.

15
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 OM A0654E
TUBE HOUSING COOLING CURVE ANODE COOLING CURVE
1 300 120
a vr ART we
“A ME 110
a
=
z
3 1 100 io T
上
<
©
-=
1 000 \

I o
2 >

wo
o
900

22" À 3
2 © 800 < 80

E о 700 a 7

πι \ >

8< £z \Å 2=
za 600 x

500
5æt*
= 400
\ 3
z
n> \ Е
м \ <
2 — 30 主
の N a
3 200 MN z
< X $
100 2
©
T
0 F
9 50 109 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

TIME IN MINUTES 186 14-010 10

Collimator Specifications | 0
P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 в
Maximum rating is 150 KVP. FIME IN MINUTES — 4179-010
Minimum inherent filtration of the collimator is 1.5mm aluminum equivalent at 150 KVP. Additional fil-
tration may be obtained by inserting the 1mm and/or 2mm aluminum filters.
Minimum source-to-skin distance is limited to more than 30 centimeters by the tracks on the bottom of the
collimator for mounting the accessory Extension Cylinder.

Full 17” x 17” (.43 m x .43 m) radiographic coverage at a 40"' (1.02 m) source-to-image distance (SID)
is provided for tubes with a 15 degree target angle as specified on page 1.
A high intensity GE Quartzline® Lamp with provision for long life is used for field illumination. Distinct
shadow crosshairs indicate the field center. A Bucky centering light patterm is provided to aid in longitudi-
nal focal spot-Bucky alignment.
The collimator can be rotated and locked positively at 0°, +/-15°, +/-30°, +/-45°, and +/-90° from the
front position.
DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY MINIMUM INHERANT FILTRATION

COMPONENT MM/S AL. EQUIV. KVP MEASURED

Tube Insert 0.7 130 KVP

Tube Housing 0.3 130 KVP
Collimator 1.5 150 KVP
Additional Collimator Filters 1.0 一
2.0 一

16
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 OM A0654E

SERVICING
Periodic Maintenance

In order to obtain continued safe performance of this x-ray equipment, a periodic maintenance program
must be established. lt is the owner’s responsibility to supply or arrange for this service.

Maintenance procedures for the AMX-Il X-Ray Unit are required one month and three months after
completion of installation, and every 6 months thereafter. These maintenance procedures are described
in Chapters 5 and 8 of Service Manual AO654D and outlined on PMS Data Record - Mobile Generator
1 — form F3316.
Qualified Service Available

Safe equipment performance also requires the use of service personnel specially trained on medical X-ray
apparatus. General Electric Company, Medical Systems, and its associates maintain a world-wide organization of
stations from which one may obtain skilled X-ray service. If desired, arrangements can usually be made to furnish
preventive and/or emergency service on a contract basis. A GE representative will be glad to discuss this plan.

User Service and Maintenance

General Electric x-ray equipment contains operating safeguards to provide maximum safety. Before call-
ing for service, be certain proper operating procedures are being used.

This equipment should be cleaned frequently, particularly if corroding chemicals are present. Use a cloth
moistened slightly in warm soapy water (use mild soap) to clean the trim and nameplate of the Operator's
Panel. Wipe with a cloth moistened in clean water. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind as they may
dull the finish or blur the lettering. Polish with PURE liquid or paste wax. Do not use a wax containing
a cleaning substance. Do not use wax on the meter front. Other surfaces of the unit can be cleaned using
a clean cloth moistened slightly with a good mild cleaner and polish acceptable for use on enameled metal
surfaces.

Excessive water and cleaning solution may leak into the AMX-11 and damage the electronics. Clean the unit
only with a slightly moistened cloth.

The Main Power Circuit Breaker interrupts power to the X-Ray unit in the event of overload in the high
voltage system. When this occurs, the control panel lights will go out. To resume operation, place the main
power circuit breaker to the ON position. Repeated power interruptions indicates a fault in the high
voltage system. Have the unit checked by a qualified GE Medical Systems serviceman.

17
 TECHNIC
SELECTED PRIMARY - VOLTS MA KVP TIME (Sec.)

MAS KVP
GE Medical Systems

GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 USA
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North Amencaj
GE Medical Systems—Europe: Telex 261794
Shortlands, Hammersmith, London WE BBX UK
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS АМХ-И Х-ВАУ ИМТ
1-1582 SM A0654E

CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION

NOTE: This Chapter and Chapter 4, Part | apply only to AMX-I units packed for export with vertical
column removed, or for domestic units without the horizontal telescoping arm assembied to the
vertical column.

For domestic AMX units with high level assembly, refer to Chapter 4, Part il. Units with high
level assembly have the horizontal telescoping arm assembied and tied down with straps for
shipment.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE

1 PREINSTALLATION еее кения 3-1

1-1 Introduction ον νο εν ενω εκ νο κ ο ων εν ο κ κ εν ο κ ο ue 3-1
1-2 Compatibility Requirements for HEW Certification................ 3-1
1-3 Safety Precautions ..........,..........................,.. 3-1
1-4 Tools and Materials ..........,...................,......... 3-2
1-5 Delivery Data .....................,...,....,...,..,...... 3-3

2 INSTALL TUBE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY ................ a m- 3-3A

2-1 Install Vertical Column <... ce eee εν ον εν ων 3-3A
2-2 install Telescoping Arm ......,..........,.......,.,........ 3-4
2-3 Install X-Ray Tube Unit ............................,.,,.. 3-5

3 CABLES . ee en eee eee eet tence tenes 3-7

3-1 Install High Voltage Cables .................................. 3-7
3-2 install Stator and Coillimator Cables. ........................... 3-8

4 INSTALL HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER ........................ 3-10

5 CONNECTING CABLES ...............oooooooo.o.. A 3-12

5-1 Stator Cable...........................................,.. 3-12
5-2 Collimator Cable .......................,...........,...... 3-13
5-3 HV Cables ....,........................,..,,,..,.,,..:.. 3-13

6 BATTERY .............. ee 3-15

6-1 Unpacking and Preparation ........................,.,....... 3-15
6-2 Initial Charge of New Battery ..................,............. 3-17
6-3 Check Electrolyte Level .. ο εαν ο 3-21
6-4 Battery Installation in Unit .............<
<<< « <<< s <<.. 에이 3-22
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

TELESCOPING
ARM

VERTICAL COLUMN

HV CABLE
UNIT CLAMPS

SENTRY COLLIMATOR HV CABLES

HANDLE >". < > de 7777 X-RAY CONTROL

FRONT PANEL

CABINET HOUSING
HV TRANSFORMER
AND BATTERY

23562-P10

ILLUSTRATION 3-1

COMPONENT NAMEPLATE LOCATION

AMX-I X-Ray Unit Beneath the Handswitch Bracket

Transformer Beneath terminal strip 7TB1
Tube Unit On the back trim cover
Collimator Bottom rear of the trim cover

3-ii
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

SEC. 1 PREINSTALLATION

11 Introduction

The AMX-II is identified by the following model numbers:

4 X-Ray Control 46-165600G10, G11, G12, G14, G15

HV Transformer 46-150625G1
Coilimator 46-177399G1, G2 or 46-194759-G1
Tube Unit 46-155750G2, G3, G4
Battery (cell group) 4§-152812P1
Extension Cylinder (optional) 46-138573G1

Assembly of the unit consists of installation of the HV Transformer in the cabinet, installation of the
telescaping arm and fork on the vertical column, mounting the x-ray tube on the fork, connecting HV
cables between the HV Transformer and the x-ray tube unit, and installation of the battery in the
cabinet. In addition, for export units, the vertical column must be installed to the mobile base assembly.
Then the unit must be checked and adjusted for proper operation.

NOTE: Two men are required to install the vertical column, the telescoping arm, the HV
transformer, the x-ray tube unit and the collimator.

1-2 Compatibility Requirements for H.E.W. Certification:

To meet H.E.W. regulations regarding beam quality, exposure MAS, minimum filtration, and beam
collimation, the AMX-II X-Ray unit must consist of the following model number components. Name-
plates for these components include the statement "this product conforms to all applicable standards
under 21CFR Sub. Chap. J.”

A Basic Unit 46-165600G 10, G11, G12, G14, G15

H-V-Transformer 46-150625G1
X-Ray Tube Unit 46-155750G2. G3. G4
Collimator 46-177399G1, G2 or 46-194759-G1
Extension Cylinder (optional) 46-138573G1

13 Safety Precautions |

Any person providing installation, maintenance or service on this unit must follow safe procedures to
avoid needless accidental injury.

Work on any electrical apparatus involves the risk of electric shock. On a battery operated unit such as
this, additional precautions are required because of the following conditions:

1. This x-ray unit contains a 120 v rechargeable battery inside the cabinet. It is possible to disconnect
the battery from the x-ray unit circuits. However, the battery is a source of power when contacted
directly even with all the switches off.

2. | If a conductive metallic object comes in contact with the battery terminals, high currents may cause
damage to the object, to the battery and severe burns to the serviceman.

WARNING: THE ELECTROLYTE USED IN NICKEL-CADIUM BATTERIES IS A CAUSTIC

SOLUTION OF POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE. SERIOUS BURNS WILL RESULT
IF IT COMES IN CONTACT WITH ANY PART OF THE BODY. IF ELECTROLYTE
GETS ON THE SKIN, WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH LARGE QUANTI-
TIES OF WATER, NEUTRALIZE WITH VINEGAR, LEMON JUICE, OR 3

3-1
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

PERCENT ACETIC ACID. IF ELECTROLYTE GETS INTO THE EYES, FLUSH

WITH WATER AND GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

3. Because of the potential hazards mentioned above, the serviceman must remove rings, wrist watch,
etc. and WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES when working on or near the battery. He must follow battery
| installation and maintenance procedures given in Chapters 3 and 8. Furthermore, the serviceman
should not leave the x-ray unit unattended with the battery compartment cover and the ::assette
tray removed, unless adequate warning signs and safety measures to limit access to the area are made.

4. The x-ray control access door, shown in Illustration 3-1, can be opened only with a key. Because of
the possible electrical shock and other hazards present when this door is opened, the key should not
be left in the lock but should be retained by the serviceman or by the customer. The serviceman
should not leave this unit unattended with the door unlocked and open, unless adequate warning
sions and safety measures to limit access to the area are made.

5. When recharging the battery, the x-ray unit must be located in a large ventilated room. During
normal charging conditions and when all batteries are functioning properly, there is little or no gas
emitted. Should abnormal conditions develop, there could be an accumulation of hydrogen gas
which, if confined in a small space, would be explosive in the presence of flame or electrical spark.
Whenever the extension cord plug is inserted in a wall outlet, a fan ventilates the battery compartment.
A hazardous situation will not develop where the outflow from this compartment is into a large or
a well ventilated small room.

6. An audible tone and/or red x-ray light indicated presence of radiation. If either indicator is on at
any time other than the expected x-ray exposure interval, immediately release the handswith X-RAY
and ROTOR buttons and move the Main Power Circuit Breaker to OFF. Perform the procedure for
disconnecting the HV Transformer before attempting to determine the malfunction.

THIS UNIT IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS AREAS.

1-4 Tools and Materials

The following will be required in addition to the standard serviceman's tool kit:

(1) Voltmeter, 0/150/300 VAC, 25 to 500 Hz, accuracy 3/4 of 1% of full scale, Weston Instruments
Inc., Cat. No. 433-1903010. Where this meter is not readily available, use the following
instruments with lower response on the square wave 60 Hz and the higher frequency (500 Hz)
voltage. Voltmeter, 0/150/300 VAC, 25-125 Hz, accuracy 3/4 of 1% of full scale, GE type AP-9,
Cat. No. 50-20102RHRH or Weston Instruments Inc., Cat. No. 433-1903009.

(2) Multimeter, Simpson Model 260, Triplett Model 630 or equivalent (20,000 ohm/volt dc, 5,000
ohm/volt ac).

(3) Standard wrench (507A935G

1) for GE type Ii cable terminals.

(4) Oscilloscope, Tektronix 564 or equivalent, dual trace, memory tape with algebraic addition
feature and X10 probes. (A Tektronix type 422 scope is satisfactory where troubleshooting
is not required.)

(5) 1 gallon (3.8 litres) Diala AX for adding to HV transformer, if required.

(6) Can of 75-25 cleaning solvent and rags for cleaning. (Do not use for cleaning covers)
(7) Spintite or socket wrench, 11/32” hex
Spintite or socket wrench, 3/8” hex
Medium screw holding screw driver
Spintite or socket wrench 1-1/16” hex

(7) Clamp on Ammeter, GE Model AK-4.

 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

(8) Level (Machinist)

(9) HEW Field Test Kit including receptor alignment tool (RAT) 46-177371P1 and Standard Test
Absorber 46-173632G1.

(10) Digital multimeter, Fluke Model 8000A or eguivalent.

(11) DC Milliammeter 1.5/16/150, accuracy 1/2 of 1% of full scale, Weston Instructions, Inc., Model
931 or equivalent.

(12) Collimator alignment fixture, 46-166390G1.

(13) 14x 17 (35.5 x 43.2 cm) cassette and x-ray film.

(14) DC ammeter; 0-5 amp. 4” scale, +/- 2% F.S. accuracy: GE Cat. 50-250400 LSLS, or equivalent.

(15) Lampioad device, 1200 watt, consisting of 8-150W, 120 V lamps in parallel.

(16) Non-metallic case flashlight.

(17) Variable autotransformer, 5 amp., 120 VAC input, 0-140 VAC output, with ground GE Cat.
9T92A91, or equivalent.

(18) Safety Tape: and warning signs.

(19) 0.5K, 2-w potentiometer wired as variabie resistor.

(20) Torque wrench 0-4 ft.-!b. or 0-50 in.-Ilb. with 9/64” hex drive. Snap-on Tools Model TSQ-4 torque
wrench with TMA-4 1/2-9/64" hex drive or equivalent. This tool required to give proper tighten-
ing of components in assembly of the unit.
a (21) 10 2 100W adjustable resistor and shorting switch.

1-5 Delivery Data

The x-ray unit is shipped in the following parts for domestic delivery.

Item or
Box No. Drawing No. Description

(1) 46-165600 X-Ray Control and mobile stand

(2) 46-150625G1 HV Transformer

(3) 46-165850G2 Telescoping Arm

46-165897G2 Yoke Asm.
46-165775G1 Cover
46-125388G2 HV Cables

(4) 46-155750 HRT-09N Tube Unit

(5),(6),(7) 46-152812 Batteries
(8) 46-177399G1, G2 Collimator
or 46-194759-G1
Remove the plastic cover from the x-ray control mobile stand. Remove the HV Transformer fram crate.
Remove HRT tube unit from the box. Place these items in the assembly area.
Do not discard any crates, boxes of packing materials until all parts have been accounted for.

3-3
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC. 2 INSTALL TUBE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

21 install Vertical Column (not reguired for domestic units)

Clean the base of the Mounting Support with CDX 75-25 to remove dirt or grease.

Apply a small amount of Way-Mat oil to the center alignment hole in the base mounting support.

NOTE: Two men are reguired to mount the vertical column to the AMX Base Assembly.

Place the column in the support assembly checking that the center pivot engages the hole in the
bottom of the support plate and the column rotates freely 1809 each side of center.

Install six 5/16-18 unc x 3/4” hex socket cap screws in the bearing retainer ring at the base of the
column. Refer to Illustration 3-1A.

Mount the two semi-circular braked discs to the lower column casting with eight 8-32 unc x 3/8”
bind head screws. Mount (2) splice plates to brake discussing four 8-32 unc x 3/8” bind head screws.

NOTE: The cable inspection cover (square cover at base of column) will be installed after
completion of mechanical assembly and counterbalancing of the vertical column.
It is mounted using two 10-32 unc x 3/8” bind head mounting screws.

23569-P10
SIX 5/16 - 18 X 3/4”

ILLUSTRATION 3-1A

3-3A
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

SEC. 2A INSTALL HORIZONTAL EXTENSION ASSEMBLY

2-2 Install Telescoping Arm

The unit as shipped has the carriage loaded against the top stops of the vertical column.

1. Remove the telescoping arm, spacers and bracket out of its shipping container.

2. One man must hold the arm and insert the two studs into the carriage. See Illustration 3-2.

) YOKE ROTATION LOCK

|

INTERLOCK
BUTTON

——=5/16" x 18

SPRING
TENS ION
ADJUST

18698-P10

ILLUSTRATION 3-2
3. A second man must place the bracket over the top of the arm and fasten but do not tighten, with
three 5/16- 18 unc x 1/2 hex soc. hd. screws.

4. Insert enough “UU” shaped spacers (four are furnished in bag no 2). between the carriage and the
telescoping arm to maintain the arm in a horizontal position. Check with a level with unit on a level
floor.

5. Tighten the three screws securing the bracket.

6. Secure the two carriage studs located at the rear of the carriage with two 5/16-18 unc hex hd nuts
and flat washers.

7. Loosen the carriage lock while manually holding the arm.

3-4
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

Carefully release the arm.

Lower the arm until it is three feet (.9 m) above the floor. Secure the Carriage Lock.

10. Check that the cable is riding in the cable guide. If the cable is too slack, it may jump off the guide.
If this occurs, the cable will be severed after two or three movements of the carriage.

CABLE
GUIDE

23570-P 10
ILLUSTRATION 3-2A

Continue to check on the cable until the x-ray tube unit is mounted and the counterbalance system is
properly adjusted.

2-3 Install X-Ray Tube Unit

1. Remove upper halves of the yoke trunnion. See Illustration 3-3. Be careful not to lose any spacer
washers. Note: Collimator installed in Chapter 4, Section 2, Unpack the X-Ray Tube Unit.

2. Apply a film of Way-Mat oil (furnished plastic bottle) to the bearing surfaces of the yoke trunnion
halves.

3-5
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-981 A Indicates Change SM A0654E

OKE |
TRUNNION

ВР Л ma 20032-P 10
ILLUSTRATION 3-3

A 3. Set the tube unit on the yoke trunnions with tube port down and the HV cable receptacles pointing
to the rear.

A 4, install the upper halves of the yoke trunnion.

Use (3) or (4) of the 3/8” (9.53 mm) O.D. flat washers at the lower joints and (3) or (4) of the
»

1/2” (12.7 mm) 0.0. washers at the upper joints as spacers.

b. Tighten the lower screws.

c. Tighten the upper screw of the left half.

d. o If there is excessive drag as the tube unit is rotated, install another spacer washer.

e. Install the lock knob at the upper joint of the right trunnion.

A 5. Adjust the counterbalance system to support the arm and tube, if necessary.

The counterbalance system is properly adjusted when it requires the same force (2.3 kg to 5.9 kg) (about
5 to 13 Ibs.) to move the arm up and down. It is adjusted by turning the 1-1/16-inch nut at the top of
the column. Clockwise rotation increases force in the up direction and counterclockwise rotation decreases
force in the up direction.

3-6
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-IE X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC. 3 CABLES

3-1 Install High Voltage Cables

1. Remove bag containing silicone grease, grounding rings and rubber gaskets from each HV cable.

2. Take the cardboard protector boxes off one end of the cables.

3. Uncoil the HV cables.

4. Move the vertical carriage until the x-ray tube unit port is about 4 feet (1.2 m) from the floor.

5. Locate the four HV cable clamps. See Illustration 3-4.

| Sd

i 18700-P10

ILLUSTRATION 3-4

6. Install the HV cable plugs into the x-ray tube unit, without using grounding rings, gaskets or
petroleum jelly at this time.

7. Extend the telescoping arm to its maximum distance.

8. Route the HV cables through the cable clamps on the telescoping arm as shown in Illustration 3-4.

9. Locate the telescoping arm in its lowest position.

3-7
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-lt X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

10. Route the HV Cables through the column cable clamps as shown in Illustration 3-5.

18701P10
ILLUSTRATION 3-5

11. Secure each clamp with two 6-32 unc x 1” screws.

12. Lay the protected ends of the HV cables on the mobile base until the HV Transformer is installed.

32 Install Stator and Collimator Cables

1. Open the Cassette Tray, illustration 3-6.

18702-P10
ILLUSTRATION 3-6

3-8
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

Remove the rubber liner covering the bottom of the drawer.

W

Loosen the four screws (two in each corner) in the bottom of the tray.
W

Slide the screws toward the center of the tray and remove it.
A

Uncoil the stator cable attached to the tube unit.

M

Locate the Collimator cable.

ο

7. Route both the stator cabie and the collimator cable along the cathode HV cable. Use rubber straps
to fasten the stator and collimator cable to the HV cable and hold it in the properly draped position.

8 Leave enough excess collimator cable to make connection to the back of the collimator.

Remove the two panels on the cabinet located behind the vertical column.

8TS1

HV CABLE

| — COLLIMATOR CABLE

—— STATOR CABLE
が
v“
18703-P10

ILLUSTRATION 3-7

10. Run the stator cable through the top 7/8” (22.23 mm) hole in the larger panel, illustration 3-7.

11. Run the collimator cable through the lower 7/8” (22.23 mm) hole.

12. Lay both cables on the mobile base until the HV transformer is installed.

3-9
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC.4 INSTALL HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

1. Remove the five pan hd bolts securing the transformer retainer bracket. See Illustration 3-8.

HV TRANSFORMER

(4) THREE INCH (76.2mm)

SPACERS
KICK PANEL

1 INCH (25.4mm)
PLASTIC GROMMET

TRANSFORMER
RETAINER
BRACKET

HV TRANSFORMER
TERMINAL COVER

i BATTERY RETAINER MYLAR Pace

* ВВАСКЕТ
9 _ 一 . : GR6539
ILLUSTRATION 3-8

2. Remove the HV transformer oil filler cap shown in Illustration 3-9.

3. Insert point of punch into holes in cap and tap with hammer to rotate CCW to loosen, if necessary.

4. Turn a#10-32 unf screw into the cover under the cap and lift it out. Discard the rubber o-ring that
is on that cover.

5. The transformer oil level should be within 1/4” (6.25 mm) +/- 1/16” (1.59 mm) of the top. Add
more oil if necessary.

6. Replace cover and cap.

310
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-11 X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

7. Carefully push the HV transformer into the cabinet with the HV receptacles facing the column.

ーー CAP
İNSERT PUNCH TİP . |2 TEMPORARILY TURN IN
#10 -32 SCREW TO

mr
‘ AND TAP TO LOOSEN
LIFT OUT

REMOVE AND DISCARD

O-RING `

0 MA
12289-P10

ILLUSTRATION 3-9

8 Replace the HV Transformer retainer bracket shown in Illustration 3-8.

9. Locate the HV transformer terminal cover and a plastic bag containing four 3” (76.2 mm) long spacer
studs. Install the spacers on the four screws protruding out of the HV transformer. Connect the six
wires to the HV transformer terminals as follows: (Check that there is a 1” (25.4 mm) 1.D. plastic
grommet around the six wires before connecting.)

LEAD LABELS CONNECT TO HV TRANSFORMER TERMINAL

P1 P1
P2 P2
G G
XC XC
XS XS
MA MA

10. The terminal cover will be installed later, after tests are completed. Set aside the cover and the four
8-32 unc x 1/2” machine screws furnished.

311
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC.5 CONNECTING CABLES

5-1 Stator Cable

1. Route the stator cable over the top of the transformer and to the left end of the 8TS1. See Illustration
— 3-10.

ν
a ος
1870410
ILLUSTRATION 3-10
2. Then route the stator cable along the main harness to the other side of the HV Transformer. Pull
the cable through to take up the slack. Remove rear cover and remove screws holding x-ray con-
trol cover and remove cover.

3. Route the stator cable to the 3TB1 panel as shown in Illustration 3-11.
a

CAUTION: Route stator cable

at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) away
from 1R4 and 1R7. They become
hot and may damage the cable.

23571-P10
ILLUSTRATION 3-11
4. Cut the wires as required and instal! soiderless push-on terminals.

312
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I! X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

5. Connect the leads as indicated below:

Lead Color Terminal No.

Red/Wht lead with in-
White 3TB1-39 line connector located
in. main harness
Green 3TB1-29
Black 3TB1-28

Red Tape up ends

Blue

5-2 Collimator Cable

Route the collimator cable to the 8TS1 terminal strip located above the HV transformer. See III-
ustration 3-10. °

2. Connect the collimator light cable as follows for Collimator 46-177399-G1

Control End Collimator End

Lead Color Lead Mark Terminal No. 4P2

Black 14 8TS1-14 -C
White 13 8TS1-13 -A
Red 5 8TS1-5 K
Blue 6 8TS1-6 -H
Green 13 8751-13 -A Additional leads
Orange 14 8TS1-14 -C added to 6 con-
ductor cables
NOTE: F limat 177 46-194759-G1
o or Collimator 46-177399G2 Control End Collimator End
Lead Color Lead Mark Terminal No. 4P2
Black 14 8TS1-14 C
White 13 8TS1-13 A
Red 15 8TS1-15 in-line Gry K
Blue 16 8TS1-16 in-line Blu H
Green 13 8TS1-13 A
Orange 14 8TS1-14 6
Bik/Wht 11 8TS1-11 M
5-3 HV Cables

1. Replace large panel on the cabinet ^ -

as shown in Illustration 3-12.

2. Installa strain relief on the collimator 23572-P10

cable and the stator cable. ILLUSTRATION 3-12

3-13
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS © AMX-II X-RAY UNİT
7-1576 SM AQ654E

3. Remove the cardboard covers from the HV cable ends near the HV Transformer.

4. Make a trial installation of the cable terminals into the transformer receptacles without using ground-
ing rings, rubber gaskets. Orient the strain reliefs upward and slightly outward so that the cables
clear the vertical column.

a Place a little silicon compound on the threads of the rings.

b. Insert the terminal into the receptacle and tighten the ring until the cable strain relief is no
longer free to run. Check that only two or three threads remain exposed on the ring.

5. An HV transient may occur from arcing at the HV receptacles due to improper grounding and/or
air in receptacles. Any time these conditions exist, they can cause HV cable punctures, x-ray failures
or damage to an HV transformer. Therefore, remove the HV cable terminal from the receptacie at
each of the four connection points (two anode and two cathode connections) and carefully follow
the procedure below to make the proper connection.

a. Inspect each receptacle. Use CDX 75-25 cleaning solvent, if necessary, to clean out dirt and
moisture. Dry it with a clean, tintless cloth. :

b. Clean each HV cable terminal using CDX 75-25. Dry it with a clean lintless cloth. Inspect
for correct spread of pin ends. Remove excess solder, if any, on the pins that would prevent
full insertion into the receptacles.

c. Place the tapered rubber gasket over the HV terminal and against the ground shield with small
diameter toward the pins and a notch over the boss.

d. Place a 514A727P1 grounding ring on the cable terminal. When layed on a flat surface, the
grounding ring should have corrugations measuring 3/16” (4.76 mm) minimum to the highest
point. If necessary, bend it to increase the height, otherwise, the contact pressure may be in-
adequate to ground.

e. Coat the end of HV cabie plug with silicon compound* to make a round mound equal to the
height of the pins. Use a clean dry wood stick such as a tongue depressor to spread a thin layer
of silicon compound over the side of the plug. It need not cover the surfaces covered by the
grounding ring.

f. Insert the HV cable terminal into the receptacle guiding the boss of the terminal into the slot
of the receptacle. Press down on the terminal. if the correct quantity of silicon compound
was used, it should ooze up into the space around the grounding ring. Otherwise, remove the
cable terminal and repeat the procedure.

g. Hold the plastic strain relief in the desired position and tighten the threaded ring with a span-
ner wrench. Wipe off the excess silicon compound that has oozed out.

*Use only thessilicon compound furnished with HV cables or procured from National Parts Service or
factory equivalent.

3-14
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

SEC. 6 BATTERY

It is assumed that all preceding installation steps have been completed so that there are no unconnected
electrical circuits such as stator or HV cables. The collimator lamp circuit wires remain unconnected as the
collimator is not to be installed until after the x-ray filament check.

Initial charge of battery will be done with battery located on floor next to unit and with operator’s panel
open for voltage and current checks. The procedure will typically take 10-12 hours and require monitoring
every half hour. The total time however, need not be continuous, but may be split over two or more work-
ing days.

6-1 Unpacking and Preparation

1. Review the safety precautions in Section 1-3 before installing the batteries.

Remove rings, metal watch bands and identification bracelets. Metal articles will, if allowed to contact
intercell connectors, fuse themselves to the connectors and cause severe burning. Check pockets for
loose metal objects that could fall across battery intercell connectors. Wear safety glasses and do not
smoke or use an open flame while working near the battery.

2. Locate the unit in a well-ventilated area or room where access can be restricted during the initial charge
© procedure. Setup safety tape to define limited access, hazard area. Post appropriate warning and
caution signs. Obtain and prepare three Battery Service logs F3560.

3. Unpack the three 30-cell groups that comprise the battery and place them on the floor. The battery
does not have a charge. However, a DC meter placed across the input and output terminals of each
cell group will show about 10 to 30 V which may disappear if loaded.

4. Some white powdery potasium carbonate may be found on the battery cells. Excessive accumulation
can cause electrical leakage between cells. Therefore, remove any powdery deposits with a non-metallic
brush or compressed air.

5. The electrolyte in a cell will not be visibie above the baffle when the battery has little or no charge.
Therefore, do not check electrolyte lever until after the battery is charged. Do not add any distilled
water to the electrolyte of an uncharged battery.

6. Battery is shipped with vented caps regardless of color of cap.

7. Wrap tape on a 9/64” hex drive of torque wrench so only the tip is exposed (to avoid shorting the
battery cells if it falls across the terminals). Use it to check tightness of screws fastening the inter-
cell connecting links. Torque value for cell terminals is 3.7 ft. lb. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Use
tool #20 as described at 3-2 of this chapter.

8. Remove the kick panel from the unit shown in illustration 3-8. The panel is anchored by three
screws on top and two on the bottom.

9. Remove the battery retainer plate for access to battery leads.

10.. Double check to make certain that the Main Power Circuit Breaker is OFF.

11. Arrange the three cell groups on floor in front of unit. Space the cell groups several inches ( 150 mm)
apart for air circulation. Keep heat sources such as the lamp load away from the battery.

3-15
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

PROTECTIVE
BARRIER

VENT CAP

LINK

21288-D10

ILLUSTRATION 3-13

VENT CAP ASSEMBLY

INTERCONNECTING
LINK '

30 CELL BATTERY PACK mm" 12291-P 10

ILLUSTRATION 3-14
3-16
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS | АМХ-И Х-ВАУ ИМТ
6-978 SM A 0654E

12. Before connecting battery leads, cut six (6) 1-1/2” x 3” (38.1 mm x 76.2 mm) strips of insulation
paper. Bend in half and wedge between the first and second as well as last and second last cell in
each group; as shown in Illustration 3-13. This will prevent damage to battery if a washer or screw
slips on connection of battery leads.

13. Connect the battery lead labelled (-) from the Main Power Circuit Breaker to the negative terminal of
the left hand cell group. (A in Ill. 3-14). Use two No. 6 AWG leads 6” (152.4 mm) long to intercon-
nect the cell groups (B to C and D to E in III 3-14). Connect the battery lead labelled (+) from the
Main Power Circuit Breaker to the positive terminal of the right hand cell group (Е т 11. 3-14).

14. The battery terminals have flat sided washers as part of the terminal hardware. The flat side serves
as a visual indicator during torquing. During initial screw engagement the washer rotates, and upon
tightening, rotation stops. This indicates that the screw is tightened in the terminal and not binding
or bottoming when proper torque is reached. Tighten ail six terminal to 3.7 ft. Ibs. torque. Push
Temflex sieeving over solderless terminal lug.

6-2 Initial Charge of New Battery

Check that the OPERATOR'S KEY switch and Main Power Circuit Breaker are OFF.

Remove the x-ray control (Operator's panel), cover til. 3-1. The panel is to remain open only dur-
ing this initial battery charging operation to release heat from components inside the cabinet. User
charging in the working range does not generate as much heat and the cabinet is to remain closed.

Connect a digital. voltmeter across the battery plus to minus terminals. The voltage for an uncharged
battery may be less than 30 V. During charge it will rise rapidly to about 110 volts and then slow-
ly rise to 130 volts during the charge period and to over 135 volts during the overcharge period.

Locate a lead to 8TS1-2 or 8TS1-3 from the cord reel assembly. Place the clamp on ammeter
around this lead. During the first minute of charging from a 115v, 60 Hz power supply, the cur-
rent will be 4 to 5 amperes. Thereafter, it will be about 3 amps. Higher currents may indicate a
fault in the system.
Connect a 0-5 DC ammeter in series with a lamp load device consisting of 750 Watt, 5-150 Watt.
120 Volt lamps in parallel. Remove the white lead at 4A 1-2 which connects to 551-16. Connect
(-) terminal of ammeter-resistor combination to this lead and (+) terminal to 4TB 1-2. Remove
jumper from 4A1-2 to 4A1-19.
Turn the charge complete adjustment 441R30 maximum counterclockwise.

Connect Battery charger line and to the output of a variable autotransformer in the AC line. Set
autotransformer output to 115 VAC.

Turn Main Power Circuit Breaker ON. Turn OPERATOR KEY switch to charge. Monitor charge
current, Line Current, and Battery voltage.

Line Current will initially be about 5 amperes and fall rapidly. Higher currents may indicate a
fault in the charger.

Charger Current will initially be about 5 amperes and drop rapidly as battery voltage increases.

Battery Voitage will rise rapidly (in a few minutes) during this initial procedure to the order of
90-110 volts.

3-17
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-It X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 ' SM A0654E

8. Turn the charger off when battery voltage reaches 110 volts. Turn circuit breaker OFF, remove the
lamp load in series with DC ammeter and reconnect ammeter. Be sure meter polarity is correct.

9. During the remainder of the charge it will be necessary to monitor and record the charge current at
1/2 hour intervals so as to calculate the total ampere-hour charge input to the battery. Prepare a table
as shown below to record the data.

The table shows typical data during the initial charge of a new battery.

CHANGE INPUT
TO BATTERY
DATE & HOUR INTERVAL BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT INTERVAL ACCRUED
TIME FROM STEP 10 VOLTAGE END OF INTERVAL AMP-HOURS AMP-HOURS_

6/27 12:07 0.0 117.4 _ 2.5 一一 一一

12:37 0.5 122.1 2.1 1.05 1.05
13:07 1.0 122.6 2.5 1.25 2.30
13:37 1.5 123.0 2.4 1.2 3.50
14.07 2.0 123.4 2.5 1.25 4.75
14:37 2.5 123.8 2.4 1.2 5.95
15.07 3.0 124.2 2.4 1.2 7.15
15:37 3.5 124.5 2.4 1.2 8.35
16:07 4.0 124.8 2.3 1.15 9.50
16:37 4.5 125.1 2.3 1.15 10.65
17:07 5.0 125.3 2.3 1.15 11.80
Overnight Shutdown
6/28 98:00 5.0 119.4 . 2.7 —— 一一
08:30 5.5 125.3 2.3 1.15 12.95
09:00 6.0 125.7 2.2 1.1 14.05
09:30 6.5 126.1 2.3 1.15 15.20
10:00 7.0 126.3 2.2 1.1 16.30
10:30 7.5 127.1 2.2 1.1 17.40
11:00 8.0 127.6 2.1 1.05 18.45
C/10 Charge Rate
11:15 8.0 126.2 1.3 0.65 19.10
11:45 8.5 129.1 1.3 0.65 19.75
12:00 8.75 131.5 1.3 0.325 20.075
‘Charger Cut-off; Overcharge
12:15 8.75 130.5 1.3 一一 一一
12:30 9.0 133.5 1.3 0.325 20.40
13:00 9.5 139.8 1.3 0.65 21.05

3-18
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

10. Re-energize charger. Adjust AC input voltage for a charger current no more than 3.0 DC amps.

11. After 10 minutes into charging period check voltage of each cell using digital voltmeter. Voltage
should be between 1.2 and 1.55 volts. If any cell is outside this range stop charging procedure and
replace the cell group under terms of warranty. If a cell group is replaced, start over at Step 1 of
this section.

12. For protection, place the furnished red insulating boards over the top of the battery. Temporarily
secure with masking tape. :

13. Record charge input current at 1/2 hour intervals. Adjust AC input up to a maximum of 125 volts
to maintain DC charge current between 2.0 and 3.0 amps.

NOTE: This charge procedure may be discontinued overnite without having to begin at Step 1 the
following day. Turn charger ON and continue with readings as per Step 13.

14. Continue charging and recording on 1/2 hour intervals for a maximum of 8.0 hours from the inita-
tion of Step 10 - or until a battery voltage of 131 to 132 V is achieved - whichever comes first. If
8.0 hours, continue with Step 15. If 131 volts, skip to Step 16.

15. At the end of 8.0 hours from Step 10 with battery voltage less than 131 V; adjust line voltage
for a reduced charge current of 1.3 amperes. Continue at this rate, recording on 1/2 hour intervals,
until a battery voltage of 131 to 132 is realized.

16. When battery voltage reaches 131 to 132 V, slowly adjust 441R30 clockwise until the charger stops
and the charge complete lamp lights.

17. Turn OPERATOR'S KEY switch and Main Power Circuit Breaker OFF. Disconnect charger plug
from wall outlet. Move the white lead from 4A1-2 to 4A1-17 and the black lead that goes to 4 CR5
bridge from 4A1-8 to 4A1-18. If the charger board does not have terminals 4A1-17 and 4A1-18
connect a jumper (No. 16 AWG wire or larger capable of carrying 3 amps) across terminal 4A1-2.
This by-passes 4CR6 to allow battery charging even though the automatic cut-off has shut off 4CR6.

18. Connect the battery charger plug to variable autotransformer in AC line. Turn OPERATOR’S KEY
switch to CHARGE and main power circuit breaker on ON.

Adjust variable autotransformer in AC line for a charge current of 1.3 amperes.

19. Continue charging and recording change current on 1/2 hour intervals until a total of 21.0 ampere-
hours is accrued. During this overcharge i .terval battery voltage should rise from 131 to a minimum
of 135 volts. Adjust AC line input to maintain 1.3 ampere charging current.

20. When 21.0 ampere hours is accrued, and with battery still on charge, measure voltage of each cell
with digital voltmeter. All cells shall read at least 1.50 volts. Record individually all voltages in
Battery Service Log F3560. If any cell reads less than 1.50 voits that cell group should be replaced
following established warranty procedures. Use F 3560 for record information.

3-19
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 SM A0654E

21. If a cell group is to be replaced after the 21.0 ampere-hour charge, turn unit circuit breaker and
OPERATOR'S KEY switch OFF. |

Disconnect Battery lead terminals to unit and connect 1200 Watt lamp load - consisting of 8-150
Watt 120 V lamps in parailel - across battery. This will discharge entire battery (3 cell group) in
approximately the 1 hour at rate of 13 amperes.

When individual cell voltages discharge to a level of 0.5V or less, place a shorting clip across the
cell terminals. Continue until ail cells are shorted, then remove lamp load. Allow the battery to
discharge for a total of 16 hours with each cell shorted.

Remove the faulty cell group from the battery and replace with a new cell group, repeat the
initial charge from Step 1 of Section 6-2.

Put white lead back on 4A1-2.

Put black lead back on 4A1-8.

22. Turn OPERATOR'S KEY switch and Main Power Circuit Breaker OFF. Disconnect charger plug
from wall outlet. Turn battery protector adjustment 4A 1-R11 completely counterclockwise. Re-
connect jumper from 4A1-2 to 4A1-19. Connect DVM across the battery plus to minus terminals.
Connect charger cord to wali outlet. Turn Operator’s Key to charge position and main power cir-
cuit breaker on. When battery voltage reaches 135.5 +/- .5V slow turn 4A1-R11 clockwise until
4A1-K16 energizes and blower turns off.

3-20
 PMS DATA RECORD — MOBILE GENERATOR |

Date of Inspection

Mobile Generator Name

MAINTENANCE AND/OR CHECKS FREQUENCY RECORD INFORMATION, NOTES, ETC.

Counterweight cable Inspection Every 6 Months

2. Counterweight Cable Repiacement andj Every 3 Years
Carriage Lubrication
3. Yoke Rotation Bearing Lubrication Every 3 Years
4, Extension Arm Inspection Every 3 Years
5. Extension Arm Lubrication Every Year
6. Brake, Chain, and Linkage Lubrication) Every 3 Years
7. Battery Servicing Every 6 Months
8. Equélization Cycle Every Year —
9. Sentry Collimator Lubrication Every 3 Years
10. Sentry Collimator Cable Inspection Every Year
And Adjustment
11. Sentry Coilimator General Inspection | Every Year

List the equipment and serial numbers of same used on this work.

PMS Performed By
This record is used in conjunction with X-Ray Room log form No. F3219

Form No. F3316 3/16/73 PRINTED IN U S.A.

 FUNCTIONAL CHECK

MAINTENANCE AND/OR CHECKS FREQUENCY RECORD INFORMATION, NOTES, ETC.

1. X-Ray Tube Filaments Every 6 Months

2. X-Ray Tube Anode Rotation Every 6 Months
3. X-Ray Tube MA Every 6 Months MA=
4. X-Ray Contactor (Mech.) | Every 6 Months
5. Rad, Timer Every 6 Months T=
6. HV. Transformer Primary Voltages Every 6 Months Fill out Primary Load Volts Record
7. Line Voltage Compensation Every 6 Months
8. Rad. KVP Output Every 6 Months Fill IN KVP Record
9. Battery Circuit Calibration Every 6 Months
10. Tube Current Overload Every 6 Months
11. Battery or Line Current Overtoad Every 6 Months
12. Low Filament Voltage Check Every 6 Months
13. Three Second Back-up Every 6 Months
14. Indicating Lights Every 6 Months
15. Extension Arm Assembly Every6 Months
16. Column And Carriage Assembiy Every 6 Months
17. Brake And Motor Drive Every 6 Months
18. Collimator Field Lamp Voitage Every 6 Months V=
19. Collimator Alignment Every 6 Months
20. Crosshair Position Every 6 Months
21. Bucky Centering Light Every 6 Months
22. Field Size Pointer Every 6 Months
23. Extension Cylinder Alignment Every 6 Months
124. Rotational Detent Every 6 Months
25. Time Interval Every 6 Months
26. Inherent Filtration Every 6 Months ( mm of Al. Equiv.
27. Phototimer Every 6 Months
28. Auxiliary Items Every 6 Months
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 | SM A0654E

6-3 Check Electroiyte Level

Electrolyte level of a discharged cell will be below the baffle. Electrolyte level can only be checked after
a cell has been fully charged and gas bubbles from overcharging have been allowed to escape.

WARNING: BATTERY ELECTROLYTE IS CAUSTIC POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE WHICH WILL

BURN SKIN OR CLOTHING. IF SPILLED’ NEUTRALIZE WITH VINEGAR OR MILD
BORIC ACID SOLUTION OR, IF THESE ARE NOT AVAILABLE, WASH THOROUGHLY
WITH WATER. IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION IS REQUIRED IF ELECTROLYTE
COMES IN CONTACT WITH EYES.

CAUTION: Do not use hydrometers, containers or syringes that have been used for servicing lead-acid
batteries.

Do not spill water or electrolyte into the battery container. Resultant electrolytic corrosion
may cause battery failure.

1. Allow the battery to rest a minimum of 2 hours after step 20 of Section 6-2 before proceeding with
this check.

2. Use the furnished wrench to remove the caps. Turn each cap 1/4 turn counterclockwise only, then lift
it out.

3. Using a bright light (flash light with non-metallic case) examine the inside of each call for electrolyte
level. The level should be 1/4 to 3/8” (6.35 mrrto 9.53 mm) above the bottom of the baffle. Refer
to lilustration 3-15.

NOTE: 3/8” (9.53 mm) is approximately at the top edge of the second sat of holes in the side
of the baffle as counted from bottom of baffle.

4. If electrolyte level is too low use a squeeze bottle with pipette tip or syringe to add distilled water
to the 3/8” (9.53 mm) level.

CAUTION: . DO NOT overfill when adding water as the resulting expulsion during charging or
overcharging will cause additional clean-up operations. If too much water is added,
do not remove electrolyte because resulting dilution will adversely affect battery
performance.

5. Reinstal the filler cap vent plug.

6. Note and record the average water (c.c.) added per cell on F3560. Make individual notations of water
required per cell if variations exceed 3 cc per celi.

3-21
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 . ' SM AO654E

FILLER CAP VENT PLUG

BAFFLE .
LL CASE

(9.53mm)

IN THE FULLY CHARGED

CONDITION ELECTROLYTE
SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY
3/8" (9.53mm) ABOVE BOTTOM
OF BAFFLE.

LEVEL OF ELECTROLYTE IN TYPICAL CELL 16948-R11

LEVEL OF ELECTROLYTE IN TYPICAL CELL

ILLUSTRATION 3-15

6-4 Battery installation in Unit

1. Disconnect the battery leads and jumpers from each cell group. (Be sure to use the protective barriers
per Section 6-1, Step 12.)

2. Fold back the Mylar covering the battery compartment.

3. Slide one 30-cell group in the right side of the battery compartment. Before pushing it all the way in,
check that protective barriers are installed. Connect the lead out of the top main circuit breaker that
is labelled (+) to the right front corner terminal (shown as F in Illustration 3-14) of the battery pack.

4. Slide another 30-cell group into the left side of the battery compartment. Before pushing it all the way
in, install the protective barriers, then connect the lead on the side of the main power circuit breaker
that is labelled (-) to the front left corner terminal (A in Illustration 3-14) of the battery pack.

5. Slide the remaining 30-cell group into the center of the battery compartment. Insert two 7-3/4” x
16-1/4” (2.12 m x 4.91 m) red insulator boards (furnished) between the right and center and two
others between the left and center ceil group. These are to prevent the battery from sliding around.

6. Two No. 6 AWG leads 6” (152.4 mm) long are furnished. Use them to interconnect the left, right
and center battery packs. Install the protective barriers, Illustration 3-13, Connect B to C and D to
E as shown in Illustration 3-14. After the connection, push the Temflex sleeving over the solderiess
terminal lug of each end of each jumper. See Illustration 3-14.

7. Place the Mylar cover over the battery compartment and reinstall the battery retainer plate and the
kick panel.

3-22
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 SM A0654E

CHAPTER 4
PART |
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION
NOTE: Chapter 4, Part | as well as Chapter 3 apply only to AMX:-il units packed for export with the
Vertical Column removed, or for domestic units without the horizontal telescoping arm assem-
bled to the Vertical Column. For domestic AMX-Il units with high level assembly refer to
Chapter 4, Part II. Units with high level assembly have the horizontal telescoping arm assembled
and tied down with straps for shipment.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE

1 HEW FIELD TESTS ..................................,.........

2 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS.................................,....

2-1 Adijust Battery Condition Meter, 5M1..........................
2-2 Check X-Ray Tube Filament ................................
2-3 Check X-Ray Tube Anode Rotation .....................,....
2-4 Adjust X-Ray Tube Current (MA) ............................
2-5 Test the Timer.................,..,........,,,.,,.,,44.,...
2-6 Check High Voltage Transformer Primary and Battery Voltage
ÜnderlLoad............... ，
2-7 Motor Drive Speed Control Check and Adjustment................

3 INSTALL SENTRY COLLIMATOR ....................,.....,.....

3-1 Prepare Collimator (Required only for collimators shipped with finger
guard as shown in Ill. 4-6.) .......,..........,..........,....
3-2 Tube Unit—Collimator Interface Alignment (Required only if interface
plate is not prealigned and assembled to HRT-O9N tube unit. For tube
units with prealigned interface plate, skip to Section 3-4.) ..........
3-3 Collimator Installation. 0.0.00. 0 cc eee

4 COLLIMATOR MODIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL) ......................

4-1 Metric Scale Label ccc eee eee
4-2 Time Interval Adjustment ..........,.......................

5 COLLIMATOR CHECK AND ADJUSTMENTS ........................

5-1 Crosshair Position Check and Adjustment ......................
5-2 Bucky Centering Light Check and Adjustment ..................
5-3 Extension Cylinder Alignment Check (Optional Accessory) ........
5-4 Large Field Size Check......................................
5-5 Field Lamp Voltage Check ........................,.........
5-6 Collimator Beam Alignment Tests ............,,.,............

6 DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY; INHERENT FILTRATION..........

7 COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION ..............................

4-1
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-11 X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E
SEC 1. HEW FIELD TESTS

The tests and adjustments of this chapter must be followed by the ‘Functional Checks’ of Chapter 5
before the unit is turned over to the user. Do not repeat a Functional Check that has already been
covered in this chapter.

Field Tests for HEW compliance are included in Tests performed in this chapter as well as Chapter 5
“Functional Checks.” These are an elaboration of the generalized procedures given in Direction 13894
"Field Tests for HEW Compliance.” The table below lists all pertinent HEW Field Tests for the AMX-11
Reference is given to the appropriate test in Direction 13894, and the corresponding chapter and section
of this Service Manual. For a new installation, follow the procedures given in the tables and record data
on Form F3382 "System Field Tests for HEW Compliance” and/or Form 3316 "PMS Data Record—
Mobile Generator |.”

Dir. 13894 Reference

Test Name Reference SM A0654E Test Requirement Application Record Data

Application Test 5; Chapter 3 Manual Coilimator used On installation and F-3382

and Function Test Set W Section 1-2 on Mobile Unit. replacement of
Collimator.

X-Ray Test 6 Chapter 4 Audibie tone required On installation and pre- F-3382
Control Sec 2-6 for x-ray exposure. ventive maintenance calls.
Chapter 5
Sec 5-1

Tube Test 23 Chapter 4 MAS Accuracy On installation, pre- F-3316

Current— Sec 25 . . ventive maintenance calls,
Exposure Chapter 5 MAS (MEDIAN) + VARIATION and whenever repairing or
Time Sec 3-4 replacing x-ray tube, MA
Product 1 (+/-40% + .35 mas) +/- .27 mas control circuits, timer circuits
1.5 (+/-33% + .30 mas)+/- .27 mas or H.V. components.
2 (+/-21% + .32 mas)+/- .28 mas
25t04 (+/ 14% + .39 mas) +/- .30 mas
5to 8 (+/-8% + .40 mas)+/- .32 mas
10 (+/-7% + .40 mas)+/- .32 mas
12t0 300 .7% to 10%

Peak Test 21 Chapter 5 KVP Accuracy On installation, preventive F-3316

Tube Sec 3-5 maintenance calls, and F-3382
Potential KVP whenever repairing or
(KVP) 50 to 110 (+(10 KVP +7%)) replacing battery, KVP
(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial control circuits, or H.V.
reading after first 20 components.
milliseconds of exposure.

50 to 96 (+(20 KVP +7%)

(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial
reading during first 20
milliseconds of exposure.

100 to 110 (+(25 КУР +7%))

(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial
reading during first 20
milliseconds of exposure.

indirect Test 27-33 Chapter 4 19 V (RMS) at minimum On installation, preventive F-3382

Test of Test Set F Sec 5-5 battery voltage of 110 VDC. maintenance calis, and when-
Collimator Chapter 5 ever replacing coilimator or
Illumination Sec 4-1 collimator lamp.
Level

4-1
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
8-3179 SM A0654E

Coliimator Test 27-33 Chapter 4 Misalignment of edges of On installation, preventive F-3382

Alignment; Test Set F Sec 5-6 Light Field and X-Ray Field maintenance calls, and when-
Light Field Chapter 5 shaii not exceed 1.8% of SID. ever repairing or replacing
to X-Ray collimator or x-ray tube unit.
Field

Collimaror Test 27-33 Chapter 4 Field size indicators shall On installation, preventive F-3382
Alignment; Test Set F Sec 5-6 agree with actual field maintenance calls, or when-
Actual vs Chapter 5 size within 1.8% of SID. ever repairing or replacing
Indicated Sec 4-4 collimator.
X-Ray
Fieid

Inherent Test 13 Chapter 4 Half value layer of useful On installation, and when- F-3316
Filtration; Sec 6-1 x-ray beam shall not be less ever replacing tube unit, F-3381
Diagnostic than 2.3 mm at 80 KVP. insert, collimator mirror, or
Source other absorption between
Assembiv Source and patient.

SEC. 2 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

CAUTION: ON AMX-H Units it is necessary to remove x-ray control cover. To gain access to the six
screws retaining the cover, the front and rear panel covers must be removed first. With
x-ray control cover removed, extreme safety should be excersized to prevent the possibility
of electrical shock.

21 Adjust Battery Condition Meter, 5M1

If battery was recently charged, the 4A1 Board shall be allowed to cool before starting this procedure.
Remove cover and open Operators Panel and cool for a minimum of 15 minutes. Leave cover off for
remainder of tests and adjustments.

With 6CB1 and 5S1 off, connect 0.5K, 2 Watt potentiometer in series with Gray lead from 3TB1-26.

3. Connect the digital voltmeter across 4A 1-2 (+) and 4A 1-11 (-). Set on 200-vdc scale.

4. Arrange test leads so that Operator’s Panel can be closed without causing shorts. Close Operator's
panel and mechanically Zero 5M1.

5. Open Operator's Panel. Turn 6CB1 and 5S1 ON. Adjust 0.5K potentiometer for 110+/- .1 V on
Digital Voltmeter.

6. Adjust 442R10 for 5M1 reading on black mark between red and green bands.

Close Operator’s Panel and allow unit to thermally stabilize for 5 minutes.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 if Digital Voltmeter on 5M1 readings shift during the 5-minute interval. Always
check 5M1 reading with Operator's panel closed.

Turn 6CB1 and 5S1 OFF. Disconnect leads and 0.5K potentiometer. Reconnect Gray lead from
3TB1-26.

Check X-Ray Tube Filament

Disconnect 7TB1-P1 and 7TB1-P2 at the HV transformer and tape the ends (230 v will appear-at
these ends).
4-2
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E
2. Turn the circuit breaker and standby switch to ON.
3. Depress the handswitch ROTOR button while looking into the x-ray tube window. Only the small
filament is connected, the large filament is not used in this unit. If the filament does not glow, check
for improper filament circuit or HV cable connection. The small filament is the one to the left when
viewed from the anode through the x-ray tube window.
2-3 Check X-Ray Tube Anode Rotation
1. Check that 7TB1-P1 and 7TB1-P2 are disconnected at the HV transformer, and the leads taped.

2. Depress the handswitch ROTOR button while looking into the x-ray tube window.

3. When the ROTOR button is released the anode should coast for at least 10 seconds.

The x-ray tube anode should accelerate to operating speed (3400 rpm) within the 2-1/2-second interval
before the READY light glows. If rotation does not occur, check for improper connection of the stator
cable. If there is any doubt that the rotor is at proper speed, check voltages across the stator as shown in
Chapter 7, waveforms W7 and W8.

2-4 Adjust X-Ray Tube Current (MA)

The filament power and ma regulator circuits were initially adjusted during factory test. Readjustment on
installation is required because of tolerance variations between individual controls, transformers, and
tube units.
1. Remove the jumper (with banana plugs) from terminals MA+ and MA-on panel 3.

2. Install O to 150 ma, DC milliammeter +/-1/2% accuracy with plus lead in the MA+ end and the minus
lead in the MA-.

3. Connect the 7TB1-P1 and 7TB1-P2 leads at the HV transformer. '

4. Turn the x-ray tube port up and cover with a 1/8” (3.175 mm) thick lead sheet.

5. Cover the x-ray tube unit with a lead apron or place it behind a lead screen for additional radiation
protection.

Select 50 kvp and 10 mas. Make an exposure and observe that the ma meter “kicks” up scale.

7. Connect a 0 to 150 v, iron vane type, AC voltmeter across 7TB1-XS and 7TB1-XC.

8. Select 80 kvp, 200 mas. |

8,4
9. Take an exposure and read the ma meter. Do not make more than one exposure per minute.

10. if ma is not 100, adjust 3A2R34 to obtain ma x-ray tube current +/-5%.

11. Make another exposure and read the voltage across 7TB1-XS and 7TB1-XC. Record this voltage.

A 12. For this next check and adjustment, battery must be at full charge.
With power off, locate leads at main power circuit breaker 6CB1-B (heavy lead). Remove leads from
6CB1-B and connect a 10 ohm, 100 watt adjustable resistor and shorting switch as shown in Ill. 4-11-32A
between the leads and 6CB1-B. Turn power on but DO NOT MAKE EXPOSURES. Press rotor button
only. Depress switch on device shown in Ill. 4-11-32A and read voltage on DVM and adjust resistor tap
to obtain 90 VDC + 5V. With rotor depressed, adjust 3A2R30 to obtain the filament voltage recorded
earlier. Recheck this voltage with the 10 ohm resistor shorted (switch released). If difference in
voltage is more than + 1 volt, adjust 3A2R27. Repeat checks and adjustments until change in voltage
is less than + 1V with resistor in or out. Remove switch and resistor and replace leads on 6CB1-B.
4-3
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS ΑΜΧΞΗΧ-ΒΑΥ UNIT
8-3179 SM A0654E

13. To verify that filament voltage and ma regulator is optimum, refer to Illustration 4-1. Adjustments of
3A2R30 and 3A2R 34 is correct if the center scope trace is obtained when the temporarily installed
ma meter reads 100 ma during an exposure. If more or less than 100 ma is obtained with the trace
as shown at the center of Illustration 4-1, readjust 3A2R34, then readjust 3A2R30 to obtain the
center trace. Repeat this procedure until the center trace is obtained when the x-ray tube current
is 100 ma +/-5%. Record in F3382, Test 22 and F3316.

PROBE: Top of 3A2C55

GND: Bottom of 3A2C55
H: 20 ms/div
V: 0.2v/div x 10 (Probe)
TRIG: INT,DC,+,Set Point

Upper Trace: Filament voltage too high and

regulator pulling down or filament voltage normal
but regulator pulling down improperly.

Center Trace: Filament voltage correct and ma

regulator adjusted correctly.

Lower Trace: Filament voltage too low and ma

regulator pulling up cr filament voltage normal
but regulator pulling up improperly.
18775-P10

ILLUSTRATION 4-1

2-5 Test the Timer

The timer was calibrated at the factory and should not require readjustment at installation. This is a
function check to verify operation before proceeding further.

1. Check that the scope horizontal sweep calibration is correct.

a 2. Connect the scope as shown in Illustration 4-2. Make x-ray exposures at 10 mas and 100 mas,
80 kvp.

3 If the trace does not correspond with Illustration 4-2, adjust 3A1R7 to obtain correct interval
timing for the 100 mas selection as shown in the lower waveform of Illustration 4-2.

sb Check the interval timing for the 100 mas exposure. Time should be correct within +/-2%. Record in
F3316.
a
5. Select 80 kVp, 1 mAs, Make another exposure and only if necessary, adjust 3A1R9 for exposure
interval of 10 MS.

6. If the timer adjustment fails to provide proper.exposure timing, check for proper operation of the
control SCR (2CR2) and the turnoff SCR (2CR1).

44
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-iL X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

PROBE: 2TB1-1
GND: 2TB1-3
UPPER H: 20 ms/div
LOWER H: 0.2 sec/div
V: 5.0-v/div x 10 (Probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +/- Set Point

ILLUSTRATION 4-2

2-6 Check High Voltage Transformer Primary and Battery Voltage Under Load:
ο |
The HV transformer primary voltages will vary depending upon the level of charge in the battery.
It is assumed that the battery is at 118 to 120 v (full charge with 30 minutes rest) at this time. Make
several exposures as indicated for Illustration 4-3 and 4-4 to determine that the output of the x-ray unit
is correct. Do not make more than one exposure per minute. This is a function check to verify opera-
tion before proceeding further.

It is impractical to use an AC voltmeter to read HV transformer primary voltages because of the dif-
ferences in response of the various meters to the square wave voltages and because of poor damping
which results in needle oscillation during even a 2-1/2-second exposure. Use a scope to observe these
voltages.

Verify the SON-A-LERT “Beep” and Flash of the X-RAY on Lamp during the exposure. Record in
F3382, Test 6.

Connect a Digital Voltmeter (2 - 200 vdc) across 4A1-2(+) and 4A1-11(-) to measure battery voltage
under load.

Make an exposure at 80 kvp, 200 mas and note battery voltage drop between standby, stator load,
and x-ray load.

Voltage drop from standby to stator load should be from 1 to 1.5 volts and from standby to x-ray
load from 22 to 24 volts. If voltage drop is in excess of 25 voits check tightness of primary terminal
and jumper lead connections to battery. !f necessary, check each cell group voltage under x-ray load
to locate and correct cause of excessive voltage drop.

45
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

κών
ο. VELERO 1 ココ は ポニーー バニペコ ピニコ ピピ ニコニ ニニニニ ミニニコ マコ
pro» し エコ 同
PS

ο 111.
0”
ο TTT TT TTT TT TET Tees
MN NERE ISDN
så Le are pi

18726-P10 : “18727-P10
Technic for A - 110 kvp, 8 mas Technic for E - 100 kvp, 8 mas
B- 90 kvp, 8 mas F- 80 kvp, 8 mas
C- 70 kvp, 8 mas G- 60 kvp, 8 mas
D- 50 kvp, 8 mas

PROBE: 2TB1-P1L PROBE: 2TB1-P1L

GND: 2TB1-P2L GND: 2TB1-P2L
H: 10 ms/div H: 10 ms/div
V: 5v/div x 10 (Probe) V: 5v/div x 10 (Probe)
TRIG: INT,DC,+,Set Point TRIG: INT,DC,+,Set Point

ILLUSTRATION 4-3 ILLUSTRATION 4-4

27 Motor Drive Speed Control Check and Adjustment

Check that the battery voltage is in the range of 110 to 120 vdc.

Pry a wood block 2” x 4" x 24” (50.8 mm x 101.6 mm x 0.6 m) under the unit until the 16" (0.4 m)
wheels are just off the ground.

Connect a DC voltmeter (Simpson Model 260 or equivalent, 20,000 ohms/volt) as follows:

+ lead to 8A1-5
- lead to 8A1-6

Place a piece of light colored tape on the edge of the tread of one drive wheel.

Fully depress the brake handle.

4-6
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

6. Rotate the speed control knab, located on the brake handle, to maximum speed. Check voltmeter
reading and wheel RPM.

7. |f necessary, adjust 8A1R15 on the motor drive board for 54+/-2 RPM at a voltmeter reading of
75+/- 5 vdc. The reading should be steady. Variation indicates binding in the drive train or brak-
ing system. Do not exceed 80 vde average.

TABLE 1

(Wheels blocked off of floor)

Test Condition Adjustment Voltage RPM

Full Speed FWD 8A1R15 ** 76 +/-5 54+/-2

** Do not exceed 80 vdc average under any conditions.

8. W voltage and RPM values of Table 1 do not agree, remove the voltmeter and take the unit off the
wooden block. Connect a pull scale to a rigid member of the AMX. Set 6S2, the Forward-Reverse
Switch, to OFF.

With the brake handle depressed measure the force required to move the unit in a straight line on a
smooth, level, hard surfaced floor such as tile. The force needed to move the unit should not ex-
ceed 25 ibs. (11.34 kg) in either the forward or reverse directions. Note, this is not starting force.
If the moving force is greater than 25 Ibs. (11.34 kg) the drive train should be examined for a mal-
function.

47
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

SEC.3 INSTALL SENTRY COLLIMATOR

3-1 Prepare Collimator (Required only for collimators shipped with finger guard as shown in II. 4-5).

For collimators shipped with cardboard cover to protect lead fingers and with interface plate prealigned
and assembled to HRT-OSN tube unit, skip to Section 3-4.

Illustration 4-5 depicts the unit as shipped. Prepare the collimator for attachment as follows:

4 1. Detach the interface plate adapter plate and finger guard from the collimator by removing three
10-24 unc x 3/4” hex soc hms. See Illustration 4-6. Use the 9/64 T-handle Allen wrench
furnished (46-165137P1). Lift off carefully to avoid hitting the projecting lead fingers.

2. Remove the nuts holding the finger guard in place. Discard the nuts, finger guard and adapter plate.

3. Remove and discard the other two 1/4” nuts.

4. Detach the interface plate from the adapter plate by removing the four 10-32 unf x 1/2” hex hms.

32 Tube Unit—Collimator Interface Alignment (Required only if interface plate is not prealigned
and assembled to HRT-09N tube unit. For tube units with prealigned interface plate, skip to
Section 3-3.

The foliowing procedure will result in alignment of the central axis of the x-ray beam and the center of
the collimator blade and shutter arrangement. It requires use of the collimator alignment fixture (part
No. 46-166390G1). Incorrect alignment could result in lack of uniform radiation field density.

48
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS | AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

FINGER GUARD

INTERFACE
PLATE

21049-P10

ILLUSTRATION 4-5

FRONT
OF
COLLIMATOR A (3) 10-24 unc x 3/4"
SOC HMS*
À 9/64 T-HANDLE ALLEN
WRENCH FURNISHED

21371-D11
A * WITH SIZE 8 HEAD

ILLUSTRATION 4-6

4-9
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

New Style HRT-09N Tube Units (focal spot to accessory mounting surface distance of 2-5/16"'):
(58.74 mm)

Refer to Illustration 4-7. Discard the adapter plate and the 10-32 unf x 3/4” hex hms. Fasten the
interface plate directly to the tube unit with the 9/16” hex eccentrics and the 10-32 unf x 1/2” hex
hms furnished. Do not tighten the machine screws at this time.

Remove the protective plastic cap from the collimator alignment fixture. Attach the alignment fix-
ture to the interface plate with the three 8-32 unf x 3/4” hex soc hms. Use the 7” (177.8 mm) shank
Allen wrench furnished with the collimator. See Illustration 48.

3. Rotate the tube unit and alignment fixture for a horizontal x-ray beam.

WARNING: FOR PROPER APPLICATION DURING ALIGNMENT, USE THE FOLLOWING X-RAY
TECHNIQUES

60 KVP, 200 MAS (2 seconds)

THE ALIGNMENT FIXTURE IS DESIGNED TO PROVIDE SUFFICIENT RADIATION
PROTECTION WHEN THE TUBE UNIT IS OPERATED AT OR BELOW THESE TECH-
NIQUES. A PIECE OF LEAD GLASS (MINIMUM LEAD CONTENT-2.3MM LEAD
EQUIVALENT AT 150 KVP) ALREADY MOUNTED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE
FIXTURE MAKES IT SAFE TO LOOK INTO THE FIXTURE WITH THE NAKED
EYE. HOWEVER, AS WITH ANY X-RAY EXPOSURE, A LEAD PROTECTIVE
SCREEN, LEAD APRON, OR OTHER PROTECTIVE MEDIUM SHOULD BE USED.
IF AVAILABLE, TO AVOID UNNECESSARY RADIATION EXPOSURE.

KS
4,4
Darken the room and have an assistant make 60 KVP, 100S ma, 2 sec. exposure. Looking into
the bottom of the alignment fixture, observe correlation of the x-ray pattern with the crosshairs
on the screen. |

Observe the image of the small focal spot. When properly aligned, the crosshairs and focal spot
image should coincide.

Using the 9/16” hex eccentrics, shift the interface plate in the direciton needed for correct alignment.
(Using the open end wrenches furnished with the collimator, rotate opposite eccentrics in opposite
directions to shift the interface plate position.)

Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until alignment is satisfactory, then tighten the four 10-32 unf hex hms. After
tightening the screws, recheck the alignment to make certain it has not changed.

Rotate the tube unit and alignment fixture back to a vertical position. Remove the alignment fixture
and replace the protective cap.

4-10
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNİT
7-1576 | SM A0654E

© -0
TUBE UNIT
MOUNTING SURFACE
INTERFACE
PLATE
!

(4) 9/16" A.F. HEX

| ECCENTRICS
MOUNTS TO TUBE rl
with (4) 10-32 unf x 1/2”
HEX HD SCREWS

MOUNTING 1$ DIRECTLY COMPATIBLE

WITH HRT-09N 16062-D11

ILLUSTRATION 4-7

21049-P10

ILLUSTRATION 4-8

4-11
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

3-3 Collimator Installation

4 1. Apply Loctite 242 to the three 10-24 x 3/4” hex soc hms and attach the coliimator to the interface plate using
| these screws. Use the 7° (17.8 mm) T-handie shank allen wrench to install screws. Turn the screws until they
stop. Then, twist the wrench an additional 1/8 turn. This will apply 35 in/ib of torque to each screw.
NOTE: BE CAREFUL! Bumping the fingers projecting from the top of the collimator could bend
them out of alignment.

2. Turn the 1-1/16” inch nut at the top of the column in the clockwise direction until the telescoping
arm is properly balanced. Be sure the carriage lock is not secured when making the adjustment.

3. With a level, recheck that the telescoping arm is level with the floor. If not, additional shims must
be installed between the arm and the carriage. Refer to Chapter 3, Sec. 2-1, Step 4.

4. Detach the connector housing cover on the back of the collimator by removing the two screws in the
top corner.

5. Connect the collimator cable to the receptacle on the right side of the connector.

6. Check that the collimator can be rotated and locked positively at 09, +/-15°, +/-30°, +/-45°, and
+/-90°, from the front position by detents.

7. Check that the measuring tape in the bottom of the collimator housing extends smoothly and freely.

8. Install connector housing on collimator.

SEC. 4 COLLIMATOR MODIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)

41 Metric Scale Label
Attaching the metric scale label does not reguire recalibration of the pointers.

1. Close the blades (pointers at the right side of the drum).

2. Remove the blade control knobs by loosening the two 8-32 unc x 1/4” hex ss.

Remove the nameplate as follows:

a. Loosen the two 6-32 unc x 1/4” hex soc set screws at the top of the frame.
b. Tilt the nameplate forward enough to clear the control knobs shafts and lift out.

c. Lift out.
4. Using a right-angle screwdriver, remove the two screws holding the scale bracket. See Illustration 4-9.

5. Carefully remove the dial assembly.

NOTE: The pointers may have to be spread and held to the right slightly to accommodate removal
of the dial assembly.
6. Loosen the 4-40 unc x 3/16” hex soc ss in the left side of the scale drum.

7. Separate the scale drum assembly from the scale bracket by removing the steel shaft that goes
© through the bracket and the assembly.

8. Place a straightedge along the TOP row of dots at any scale drum to correspond to the dot positions.

9. Expose the adhesive backing behind the “100° scale position by removing the 1/2” strip of liner.

4-12
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS — AMX-HX-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

SCREWS TO REMOVE
SCALE BRACKET

18728-P10

NOTE: Trim Cover And Frame Removed For Clarity.

ILLUSTRATION 4-9.

SCREWS TO REMOVE
TIMER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

NOTE: Trim Cover Removed For Clarity 18729-P10

ILLUSTRATION 4-10
4-13
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

10. Press the exposed portion of the label around onto the scale drum with the TOP row of dots at
the 100” position corresponding to the marks on the ends of the drum.

11. Roll the covered portion of the label around the scale drum to check that the label is attached
straight. Realign the attached portion of the label if necessary.

12. Remove the remainder of the liner while carefully pressing the label firmly onto the scale drum.

13. Trim off any excess.

14. Hold the scale drum assembly in the scale bracket and pass the steel shaft back through the bracket
and the assembly.

15. Center the shaft on the bracket and align the scale drum with one of the scales indexed in the detent
position.

16. Re-tighten the set screw. Check for free rotation and proper index of the scale drum.

17. | Replace the dial assembly, nameplate, and knobs.

4-2 Time Interval Adjustment

The field light timer is for 15 to 20 seconds. М the user desires a different time interval, proceed as
follows:
For G1 collimators w/old style dashpot timer:
1. Remove the knobs and nameplate per instructions in Sec. 4-1.

2. Detach the connector housing cover.

3. Remove the collimator light cable.

Remove the trim cover as follows:

a Remove the two screws in the top corners of the back of the collimator.

b. Remove the two front screws in each cone track on the bottom of the collimator.

c. Remove the filters and set aside.

d. Remove the rotational detent button by turning it CCW. Also remove the spring. Then
fully depress the plunger shaft.

e. Rotate the collimator approximately 90° from the front position.

f. With the measuring tape fully retracted, slide the cover rearward and off.

NOTE: Make sure the cover does not get caught on the measuring tape.

4-14
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E
5. Remove the timer switch assembly. See llustration 4-10.

a. Remove the two screws, spacers, and nuts holding the assembly to the mounting plate.

b. Pull the assembly out from the side.

NOTE: SEE CAUTION. The dashpot is glass.

6. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the assembly.

7. Turn the socket head set screw on the back of the assembly CCW to shorten the interval (turn the
screw only small increments at a time).

8. Depress the button and check the time interval. Listen for the audible click in the snap action
switch. Replace the plastic cap when the adjustment is satisfactory.

9. Replace the timer-switch assembly, trim cover, light cable, connector housing cover, nameplate
and knobs. Also replace the spring and the plunger knob.

For G2 collimators w/electronics timer:

1. Remove the knobs and nameplate per instructions in Sec. 4-1.

2. Adjust potentiometer on timer circuit board located below timer button for desired timing.

3. Replace nameplate and knobs.

SEC. 5 COLLIMATOR CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
General

The collimator blade and shutter assemblies were factory aligned. Realignment in the field is not
recommended. The following adjustments, however, should be checked and readjusted if necessary.
Where instructed record data on Form F3382, "System Field Tests for HEW Compliance,” or
Form F3316, “PMS Data Record-Mobile Generator 1.”

NOTE: The mirror should NEVER be moved.

5-1 Crosshair Position Check and Adjustment

1. Position the tube unit and collimator perpendicularly over a smooth surface such as a tile floor.
Using the collimator measuring tape, set the SID at 40”. (1.016 m).

2. Darken the room and energize the field light.

The illuminated area on the cassette should show equal rectangles of light on either side of the crosshair
shadows as each set of blades is moved toward the closed position.

3. If adjustment is necessary, proceed as follows:

a. Slightly loosen the two rear screws in each cone track.

b. Slide the plastic window with the fingertips or tap the frame with a screwdriver until alignment
is satisfactory.

с. Re-tighten the cone track screws.

4-15
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

5-2 Bucky Centering Light Check and Adjustment

The Bucky centering light is factory adjusted to provide a projected crosshair image in front of the
collimator in line with the transverse centerline of the right field. If the Bucky centering light is to be
used, check the settings.

1. Adjust the biades to yield an approximate 12” x 12” (304.8 mm x 304.8 mm) field size.

2. Establish a transverse guide line-approximately 20” (0.5 m) length on a surface of 40” (1.016 m) SID.

3. Energize the field light. Position the tube unit and collimator so the shadow of the transverse
crosshair fails on the transverse guide line.

If the Bucky light crosshair shadow does not center within 1/4” (6.35 mm) of the guide line and is not
reasonably parallel to the line, adjust per the following steps.

4. Remove the blade control knobs and the nameplate per instruction in Sec. 4-1 of this chapter.

CAUTION: BECAUSE OF THE HIGH ENERGY LAMP, THE LIGHT HOUSING MAY BE HOT.

5. Slightly loosen the two socket head screws on the bottom of the light housing.

6. Slide the entire Bucky light lens assembly until the proper position is obtained.

7. Re-tighten the screws.

8 If necessary, rotate the light housing to move the Bucky light field. !f this is done, recheck the
position of the light field and the shadow crosshairs per instructions in Sections 4-1 and 6.

9. Replace the nameplate and the blade control knobs and repeat steps 1 through 3.

53 Extension Cylinder Alignment Check (Optional Accessory)

1. Position the tube unit and collimator perpendicularly over a smooth surface such as a tile floor.
Using the collimator measuring tape, set the SID at 40” (1.016 т).

2. Slide the extension cylinder into the tracks at the bottom of the collimator until the cylinder latch
snaps into the slot on the right-hand track.

3. Darken the room and energize the field light.

The illuminated area on the cassette should show egual sectors of light on either side of the crosshair
shadows.

4. | If adjustment is necessary, proceed as follows:

a Loosen the eight cone track screws.

b. Shift and/or shim the tracks as necessary.

c. Re-tighten the screws.

d. Re-check the alignment.

416
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX- X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

5. Remove the cylinder by pressing the latch.

54 Large Field Size Check

1. Position a loaded 14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) cassette under the collimator (17” (43.2 cm) dim-
ension transverse to the axis of the tube unit). Using the collimator measuring tape set the source-to-
image distance at 40“. (1.016 m).

2. Adjust the blades to yield a field size of 14“ x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm). Place a coin on the cassette
to identify the anode end of the x-ray tube.

CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRES THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. OB-

SERVE RADIATION SAFETY RULES. A LEAD PROTECTIVE SCREEN, LEAD
APRON UNIT OR OTHER PROTECTIVE MEDIUM SHOULD BE USED TO AVOID
UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE. X-RAY REQUIREMENT INDICATED BY
3. Make a 50 KVP, 1 mas exposure and develop the film.

If cutoff in the transverse direction is observed, correct lead finger spacing should be verified. Refer to
Section 2-2. This should be done as follows:

4. Remove collimator lamp cable.

5. Remove the (5) 8-32 unc x 3/4” soc hms holding the collimator to the interface plate.

NOTE: Be careful not to loosen any of the 10-32 unf hex hms securing the interface plate to the
tube unit.

6. Place the collimator upright on a table (use soft material between the collimator and table top to
protect the finish). Fully close the transverse set of blades.

With this set of blades full closed, the lead finger spacing (measured at the top edge) should be between
5/32" (3.96 mm) and 3/16” (4.76 mm) and centered. If the spacing is greater, gently bend the fingers
toward each other until the gap is within this range. If the spacing is less, bend the fingers apart until the
gap is within these limits (preferably toward the 3/16” (4.76 mm) dimension). If the latter is done, visu-
ally check that the lower portion (heel) of each finger will not cause cutoff of the primary x-ray beam at
large field sizes.

Replace the collimator and make another exposure at the field size specified in Step 2. If cutoff is still
observed, alignment of the blade and/or shutter assemblies is faulty and the collimator must be replaced.

5-5 Field Lamp Voltage Check

The voltage at the collimator lamp socket must be at least 19.0 VAC RMS at a minimum battery voitage of
110 vdc. This is an indirect test of illumination level to meet HEW requirements.

Because the lamp voltage is a square rather than sine wave, the voltage measured with a Fluke 8000A Digital
Meter will be greater than the true RMS value. Lamp voltage can be measured with a True RMS caiculat-
ing digital meter such as a Weston/Schlumbuger, model 4445. Do not use an iron-vane AC voltmeter be-
cause it will load the lamp circuit.

1. o Remove the Blade Control knobs and collimator nameplate per Section 4.

2. Measure No Load Battery Voltage using a digital voltmeter.

417
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

3. Connect Digital Voltmeter (Fluke 8000A) to read the ac lamp voltage at the collimator lamp socket
terminals.

4. - Depress the FIELD LIGHT Button and read Lamp Voltage.

5. Compare Lamp Voltage to no-load battery voltage as listed in the table below. If necessary, extrapolate
between values. The lamp voltage must be equal or greater than the values given, however too high
a lamp voltage will reduce lamp life.

No Load Minimum Lamp Voltage (VAC)

Battery Voltage RMS Ref. Fluke 8000A

128 222 243

126 22.0 24.1
124 21.7 23.8
122 21.4 23.5
120 21.1 23.1
118 20.7 22.7
116 20.3 22.3
114 19.9 21.9
112 19.5 21.5
110 19.0 21.0

6. The secondary of 8T1 is factory connected to the Blue Tap. A shift to an adjacent 8T1 tap will
change lamp voltage by approximately 0.5 v rms. If necessary, select the lowest voltage tap of 871
that provides at least the minimum voltage listed in the Table above.

8T1 Transformer Taps. (AMX— Model 46-165600G10, G11, G12)

Common Brown 一 Factory connection to 8TS1-13

Red Factory connection to 8TS1-14
TAPS listed Orange
in order of Green
increase Black
voltage Blue 一
Yellow
Black/White
BRN/WHT
7. Replace nameplate and knobs after verifying that the collimator lamp is operating in the proper
voltage range.

8. Record Collimator Lamp Voltage and battery voltage on F-3382, Test 27-33, Set F.

5-6 Coilimator Beam Alignment Tests

To meet HEW requirements:

a. The misalignment of the edges of the light field with the respective edges of the x-ray field
along either the length or width shall not exceed 2% of SID when the field is perpendicular
to the x-ray beam.

4-18
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

b. Field size indicators of length and width on collimator shall each agree with actual x-ray
field size at the receptor to within 1.8% of SID when beam axis is perpendicular to the plane
of the film.

Establish test variables using single cassette size (14’ x 17°) (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) for a vertical x-ray
beam at SID distances of 40” (1.016 m) and 72” (1.83 m).

Procedure |

a. Load a large cassette and place on floor (14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) preferred size).

b. Position Diagnostic Source assembly for vertical x-ray beam and a SID of 40” (1.016 m). Us-
ing collimator light to carefully center x-ray beam on cassette. °

c. Carefully adjust collimator field size indicators to a common field size smaller than the image
receptor—use 12” x 12” (30.48 cm x 30.48 cm) field size for a 14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm)
cassette.

d. Assemble and attach RAT to collimator using RAT holding fixture.

e. Use Collimator Lamp, note and record where edges of light field appear on RAT grid pattern.
4 4 . .
af Exposure and develop film (recommend 4 MAS at 50 KVP for par speed film with medium screens
at 40” (1.016 m) and 16 MAS at 72”) (1.83 m).

g. Measure x-ray image length and width. Each must agree with numerical indicator settings
(step c) within 1.8% of SID.

h. Mark light field (step e) on x-ray field. Total misalignment of either length or width edges must
not exceed 1.8% of SID.

i. Repeat steps a thru h for a SID distance of 72” (1.83 m).

If edge to edge light field and x-ray field alignment exceeds 1.8% of SID adjust as follows:

a. Remove the knobs and nameplate per instructions in Section 4-1.

b. With nameplate removed, temporarily reinstall knobs and adjust field size to same setting as
in 3C.

c. Slightly loosen the two light housing mounting screws. See illustration 4-12.

d. With RAT in holding fixture beneath collimator, shift light housing so that light field aligns
with the grid pattern of the x-ray field from step 3h.

419
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIVISION AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

Shift the light housing vertically to move the field forward or back and horizonally to move the
field right or left. Do not rotate the housing.

LIGHT
HOUSING
| 17 SCREWS

SOCKET HD
SCREWS FOR
BUCKY LIGHT
ADJUSTMENT

18728-P10

NOTE: Trim Cover and Frame Removed for Clarity

ILLUSTRATION 4-12

e. Retighten the two screws.

f. Replace the nameplate and the blade contro! knobs and repeat the alignment procedure.

5. If the indicated versus actual field size does not fail within specifications,adjust the appropriate pointer
or pointers as follows:

a. Remove the blade contro! knobs and the nameplate per instructions in Sec. 4-1 of this chapter.

b. Gently bend the pointer sideways to make the necessary adjustment.

c. Replace the nameplate and the knobs and repeat the alignment procedure.

6. If any test is not in compliance the collimator must be realigned and ail tests of Section 5-6 repeated.

7. Record Data in Set F,'Manual Collimator Light Field,” sheet 10, F-3382. Omit “SID” and “center-
to-center” rows in Set F Data Table.

4-20
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC.6 DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY; INHERENT FILTRATION

To meet HEW requirements, the haif-value layer of the useful beam at 80 KVP shall be not less than 2.3mm
aluminum. This test must be made of the diagnostic source assembly, at installation and whenever replacing
tube unit, insert, window, collimator mirror, or other absorption between source and patient.

NOTE: REFER TO DIRECTION 13894, PART li, SEC. 2 "RADIATION INSTRUMENTS" FOR
SPECIFIC INFORMATION ON DIFFERENT TYPES OF INSTRUMENTS.

Position radiation probe of a Dose measuring instrument so that the center of the active probe
area is 12 inches (304.8 mm) from the end of the collimator and centered in the useful beam.

Collimate down to area of probe using the light beam. Keep other equipment at least 4” (101.6 mm)
away from probe to prevent radiation scatter errors.

Use technic factors of 80 KVP; 20 to 48 MAS. MAS should be adjusted so that reading in step 5
is approximately 3/4 scale.

Remove the 1.0 and 2.0MM selective filters from the collimator.

Make an exposure and measure radiation (total R for integrating meters) with no added filters. This
represents 100% transmission level. Record readings and terminate exposure.

Place standard absorber 46-173632G1 in beam. Absorber must be in collimator accessory rails.
Repeat exposure and record reading.

Divide reading in step 6 by reading in step 5.

THEN FIXED FILTRATION

IF RATIO IS MUST BE

1. Greater than 0.5 Left as is.

2. Less than 0.5 Added (mandatory)

Filtration may only be removed if additional filtration was previously added. The amount of filtration
to be changed may be estimated as 0.5mm for each desired 0.05 change in ratio. For example, if
ratio is 0.48, a change of approximately .05, is desired, so add 0.5mm aluminum.

Fixed filters must be 1100 aluminum and should be mounted to the back of the mirror. Use a good
quality adhesive such as contact cement or epoxy. Since the filter will be at about 45° angle to the
beam use only about 0.7 of the thickness of aluminum that is calculated. Recheck before mounting
permanently (use tape for temporary mounting).

10, The 0.5 minimum ratio is mandatory, but above 0.5 ratio is not. However, above 0.57 there will be
a noticeable reduction in radiation, requiring higher technics to obtain the desired image density.

11, Record Data on F-3382, Test 13.

4-21
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS | AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC.7 COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION

This section should not be done until the remaining checks of Chapter 5 “Functional Check” listed below
are completed.

Chapter 5, Section Functional Check

2-1 Mechanical; Tube Unit and Collimator

2-2 Mechanical; Extension Arm Assembly
2-3 Mechanical; Column and Vertical Carriage
2-4 Mechanical; Base, Cabinet and Brakes
2-5-1 Mechanical; Motor Drive Controls and Interlocks
3-2 Electrical; Tube Rotation Check
3-3-2 Electrical; Tube Filament Sensor Interlock
3-4-2 Electrical; Backup Timer
3-5 Electrical; H.V. Divider, KVP Calibration and MA
4-1-1 Collimator; Uniform Light Pattern
5-1 System; Film and Indicator Checks
5-3-1 System; Battery Capacity Check

Disconnect the trickle charger circuit. This circuit was designed to trickle charge after the CHARGE
COMPLETE lamp indicates that the battery is at ful! charge. As recommended use is to leave the
unit on charge when not in service, this trickle charge feature should not be used as it will result
in excessive water use by the battery. Check that there is no jumper between 4A1-7 and 4A1-8. If
a jumper is present, remove it.

Complete battery service log forms, F3560, and piace in holder on back of cassette drawer.

Install the cover over the HV transformer terminals. Be sure the plastic grommet is placed in the
cover notch when positioning the cover over the terminal studs.

Install cassette drawer.

Install X-Ray control cover, front and rear panel covers.

Install wheel covers using the furnished eight F.H.M.S.

Demonstrate and explain unit functions as follows:

a. Demonstrate how to position the vertical column and x-ray tube before the mobile unit is
moved to a new location. Particularly point out that the latch must be connected to the latch
bar to prevent the collimator from striking the x-ray control during transport. Install two white
bumpers over the slots for adjusting the latch.

b. Demonstrate the proper operation of the motor drive feature. Emphasize that the motor will
automatically stop.

c. Explain that the unit must be manually pulled back to regain drive control if the bumper comes
in contact with any object. If the bumper is bent so it remains recessed, it must be manually
straightened.

d. Explain that the unit may be transported manually if the user-desires to or if the drive feature
fails.

4-22
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ıl X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

e. Explain that if the motor drive is used very extensivly, the batteries will require more frequent
charging.

f Explain that the unit does not require charging when the meter reads in the greeen regions.
Recharging is required only when the meter reads in the red “RECHARGE” or “LOW” region.
It is not recommended that the unit be put on charge after every use.

Make several x-ray exposures to check that the unit is functioning properly. Particularly check lamp
and tone signal exposure indicators.

Give the two x-ray control panel door keys and the six stand-by on/off switch keys to the customer.
Advise that the former should be given only to a qualified serviceman and the latter should be given
only to a qualified operator. The keys should not be left on the x-ray unit.

10. insert the technic chart (Direction 13777) furnished, into the card holder on vertical column of the
mobile stand. Call the customers attention to the location of the chart.

11. Provide a copy of the AMX-H Operating Manual, OM A0654E, and NCRP Report No. 33 to the
customer on his representative. Obtain the signed acknowledgement card for NCRP Report No. 33.

12. Complete F3382 “System Field Tests for HEW Compliance" and F3316 "PMS Data Record—Mobile
Generator |.”

4-23
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 SM A0654E

CHAPTER 4
PART Il
NOTE: CHAPTER 4, PART Ii, APPLIES ONLY TO DOMESTIC AMX-II UNITS WITH HIGH
LEVEL ASSEMBLY IN WHICH THE HORIZONTAL TELESCOPING ARM IS CON-
NECTED TO THE VERTICAL COLUMN AND TIED DOWN WITH STRAPS FOR
SHIPMENT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3 AND CHAPTER 4, PART 1, FOR EXPORT
AMX-11 UNITS PACKED WITH VERTICAL COLUMN REMOVED OR FOR DOMESTIC
UNITS WITHOUT THE HORIZONTAL TELESCOPING ARM ASSEMBLED TO THE
VERTICAL COLUMN.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE

1 PRE-İNSTALLATION..............
ısın 1

1-1 Introduction... tee eee t eee 1

1-2 Product Identification よし に し し し に に に に に に に に にし
に ュ トト に スト しーー し し に し て て ーーーー 1
1-3 Safety Precautions .....................................,., 2
1-4 Delivery Data ............................................ 3
1-5 Вамегу........... . 4
1-6 Tools&TestEguipment................... 0000 ον 5
1-7 HEW Field Tests ..........................,........,,..... 6
1-8 Documents & Forms ... nvkekee 7

2 INSPECTION & UNPACKING .......................,,...,..,.. 8

3 TUBE UNIT INSTALLATION εν ο ο ο νε κο ος 11

4 RELEASE OF HORIZONTAL ARM ..........................,... 14

5 CASSETTE DRAWER, REMOVAL .............,..............:. 15

6 BATTERY INSTALLATION eterna 16

7 H.V. TRANSFORMER .............. users eee 18

8 PRELIMINARY ELECTRICAL CHECKS ........................., 19

8-1 Calibrate Battery Condition Meter, 5 M1 ........................ 19

8-2 Check X-Ray Tube Filament & Stator .......................... 20
8-3 Check Filament & Rotor Interlocks..........................., 21

411-1
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 © SM A0654E

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont)

SECTION TITLE | PAGE

9 COLLIMATOR INSTALLATION ..........................,.... 22

9-1 Mounting Collimator .................,................... 22

9-2 Connect Collimator Cable ..................,...,......,,.. 22
9-3 Collimator Checks and Modifications ...................,..,.... 23
9-4 Vertical Column and Telescoping Arm Balance .............,... 24

10 CONNECT H. V. ИМОЕВ............. aaa 26

11 ADJUSTMENT OF MA STABILIZER............................. 27

12 PRELIMINARY KVP, TIMER, AND LOAD CHECK ................. 29

12-1 Timer Check and Adjustment ...................,........... 29

12-2 Back-Up Timer Check ................,.................... 30
12-3 Battery Load Voltage Check ............................... 30

13 X-RAY KVP AND MAS ACCURACY ......................,,... 31

14 COLLIMATOR FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS ....... 33

14-1 Cross Hair Position Check and Adjustment ...................., 33

14-2 Extension Cylinder (Optional Accessory) Alignment Check ....... 34
14-3 Large Field Size Check..........................,........., 35
14-4 Field Lamp Voltage Check ................................, 35

15 COLLIMATOR BEAM ALIGNMENT CHECK ..................... 37

16 DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY;

INHERENTFILTRATION ........... eee 40

17 MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM .......... ea 41

17-1 Motor Drive Controls and Safety Interlocks..................... 41

17-2 Motor Drive Speed Checks & Adjustment ..................... 42

18 CHARGE BATTERY .............. aaa 43

18-1 Battery Charge and Cut-Off Setting ........................... 43

18-2 While Waiting For Battery To Charge, Complete Paper Work ....... 44
18-3 While Waiting For Battery To Charge, Complete Mechanical Assembly 44

19 BATTERY CAPACITYCHECK ...........

eee 45

20 COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION .......................,... 46

41111
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E
Panel 1 - Control
CONTROL
Panel 2 - 500 Hz inverter
PANEL 1
Panel 3 - Card Rack Assembly
Board 3A1 - Timer €: Overload -
INVERTER
PANEL 2 Board 3A2 - Filament & Ma Regulator
Board 3A3 - 500 Hz Inverter Driver
Board 3A4 - Time Delay
Board 3A5 - 60 Hz Inverter Driver
BD. 3A6
Board 3A6 - Pulse Board
Board 4A1 - Battery Charger Board
BD. 4A1 (TOP) Board 4 - Battery Charger
Panel 5 - Operator Panel
Panel 6 - Major Assembly
PANEL 3 Panel 7 - HV Transformer
CARD RACK Panel 8 - interconnect
Board 8A1 - Motor Drive Board
Panel 8A2 - Orive Assist
TELESCOPING ARM TUBE UNIT

21977-D10

BD. 4 UNDER PANEL 4A1 PANEL 5 3TB1

OPERATOR
PANEL

et 一 一~ 全 <
Na NN
SENTRY MANUAL
AA NN COLLIMATOR
Wy
AA
AA
no 분: LUMN
PANEL 6 ` |

\
CABINET. — |
-4

1 τη

)
_ E İğ PANEL 8 AND
¿ena ===: | MOTOR DRIVE
a“ \ Fr 一 一 一 一 一 一 一一 コ 11 BOARD 8A1
AN X 1 i
\\ x 1 I 圖 8A2 DRIVE
AN 1 1 1 ASSIST PANEL
I |
i I
DRIVE MOTOR
PANEL 7 < 」
HV TRANSFORMER

BATTERY 21978-D10

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-1

411-411
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

SEC. 1 PRE-INSTALLATION

1-1 Introduction:

This AMX-II installation procedure is organized to minimize the time required to install and check-out
the unit. It takes advantage of the assembly and tests performed in the factory. Also, System Functional
Checks and Field Tests for HEW compliance are included in the installation procedure to eliminate dupli-
cation. .

Users of this publication are encouraged to report errors, omissions and their recommendations for im-
proving the publication (use direction form 13861A).

1-2 Product identification and Compatibility Requirements for HEW Certification:

The AMX-II is identified by the following component model numbers. To meet HEW requirements
regarding beam quality, exposure MAS, minimum filtration, beam collimation, and source to skin distance,
the sensitive componeonts making up the AMX are identified with the nameplate statement “this product
conforms to all applicable standards under 21 CFR part 1020”, or “complies with DHEW radiation per-
formance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J”.

NAMEPLACE NAMEPLATE
COMPONENT MODEL NUMBER LOCATION HEW STATEMENT

Basic AMX-II Unit 4 46-165600G

10, G14, On front of Unit yes
includes control, G15 beneath handswitch
mobile base, vertical bracket.
column, and horizon-
tal telescoping arm.

H.V. Transformer 46-150625G1 Beneath terminal strip yes

X-Ray Tube Housing 46-155750G3 On back trim cover of yes

X-Ray Tube insert 46-125686G6 Tube Housing

Sentry Collimator 46-177399G1 or G2 On rear trim cover yes

or 46-194759-G1 .
Extension Cylinder 46-138573G1 On support plate yes
(optional item)

Battery Cell Group 46-152812-P 1 End of cell group case no

(3 used per unit)

411
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

1-3 Safety Precautions

Any person providing installation, maintenance or service on this unit must follow safe procedures to avoid
needless accidental injury.

Work on any electrical apparatus involves the risk of electric shock. On a battery operated unit such as this,
additional precuations are required because of the following conditions:

1. This x-ray unit contains a 120 v rechargeable battery inside the cabinet. It is possible to disconnect
the battery from the x-ray unit circuits. However, the battery is a source of power when contacted
directly even with all the switches off.

If a conductive metallic object comes in contact with the battery terminals, high currents may cause
damage to the object, to the battery and severe burns to the serviceman.

WARNING: THE ELECTROLYTE USED IN NICKEL-CADIUM BATTERIES {S A CAUSTIC

SOLUTION OF POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE. SERIOUS BURNS WILL RESULT
IF 1T COMES IN CONTACT WITH ANY PART OF THE BODY. IF ELECTROLYTE
GETS ON THE SKIN, WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH LARGE QUANTITIES
OF WATER, NEUTRALIZE WITH VINEGAR, LEMON JUICE, OR 3 PERCENT
ACETIC ACID. IF ELECTROLYTE GETS INTO THE EYES, FLUSH WITH WATER
AND GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

Because of the potential hazards mentioned above, the serviceman must remove rings, wrist watch,
etc. and WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES when working on or near the battery. He must follow battery
installation and maintenance procedures given in Chapters 3 and 8. Furthermore, the serviceman
should not leave the x-ray unit unattended with the battery compartment cover and the cassette
tray removed, unless adequate warning signs and safety measures to limit access to the area are made.

The x-ray control access door can be opened only by first, removing the x-ray control cover as des-
cribed in Part |, Sec. 2 of this Chapter. Because of the possible electrical shock and other hazards
present when this door is opened, the servicernan should not leave this unit unattended with the
cover removed and the door open, unless adequate warning signs and safety measures to limit ac-
cess to the area are made.

When recharging the battery, the x-ray unit must be located in a large ventilated room. During normal
charging conditions and when all batteries are functioning property, there is little or no gas emitted.
Should abnormal conditions develop, there could be an accumulation of hydrogen gas which, if
confined in a small space, would be explosive in the presence of flame or electrical spark. Whenever
the extension cord plug is inserted in a wall outlet, a fan ventilates the battery compartment. A
hazardous situation will not develop where the outflow from this compartment is into a large or a
well ventilated small room.

An audible tone and/or red x-ray light indicated presence of radiation. if either indicator is on at any
time other than the expected x-ray exposure interval, immediately retease the handswitch X-RAY
and ROTOR buttons and move the Main Power Circuit Breaker to OFF. Perform the procedure for
disconnecting the HV Transformer before attempting to determine the malfunction.

CAUTION: THIS UNIT IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS AREAS.

411-2
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

1-4 Delivery Data:

The unit is shipped partially assembled as shown in Illustration 4-11-2. Copies of the Product Delivery
Instructions are included with the basic unit. These should be.used to inventory furnished parts on receipt
of shipment.

Item or Box
Marked Description

A0654E; Item A АМХ-Н with vertical column horizontal Telescoping Arm, tube yoke,
H. V. Transformer, H. V. cables, Tube Stator and Collimator cables as-
sembled to the basic unit.

CAUTION: The Telescoping arm is strapped down and locked

to prevent damage in shipment. DO NOT CUT THE
STRAP OR RELEASE THE VERTICAL LOCK
UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THE INSTAL-
LATION PROCEDURE. THE VERTICAL COLUMN
HAS BEEN COUNTERBALANCED FOR WEIGHT
OF TUBE UNIT AND COLLIMATOR WHICH HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR SHIPMENT:

Furnished Parts; (packed in the cassette drawer).

Bag No. 1 (6) T8014B Operator Keys

(1) 81645 Waymat Oil, 1 oz. (28.49)
(2) 46-165626P1 Shims for Telescoping Arm.

Bag No. 5 (2) 46-152662P1 Tube Unit Wear Strips.

(2) No. 6 Awg x 6” (152.4 mm) Black leads for battery
Interconnection.

Bag No. 7 (8) 6-32 unc x 1/4” F.H.M.S. for hub caps.

(2) 46-165618P1 Hub Caps.

(4) 46-154021P1 Battery Section insulator Boards

Envelope for H. V . Cables, containing:

(2) 507A936P1 Rubber gasket.

(2) 514A727P1 Brass ground ring.
(1) GE Silicone Dielectric Compound G-635, 2 oz. (56.79)
(1) Direction 13871A, Application of Compound.

411-3
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

item or Box
Marked... Description

A0654E; Box B Sentry Coilimator for AMX Unit with mailing tube used to protect projecting
lead fingers on top of collimator.

Furnished Parts: (Located in Box B)

Bag No. 1 (1) 46-165737P1 Allen Wrench

(5) 8-32 unf x 1” Hex-Soc Cap Screw

Bag No. 2 (1) 46-165149P1 Metric Label

A0654E: Box C X-Ray Tube Unit for AMX with collimator interface plate pre-aligned and
mounted to Tube Unit face plate.

Furnished Parts: (Located in Box C)

(2) 46-155519G2 Plastic End Caps

Bag (12) 8-32 x 1/4” Hex-Soc Cap Screw

A8104A Battery Pack for AMX-li consisting of:

(3) 46-152812P1 Cell group, Model 43B011TB01

D5312BC Extension Cylinder (Optional accessory to AMX-I1)

15 Battery:

The installation procedure is written on the basis that the battery pack for this AMX-I! has been previously
charged and electroiyte level adjusted at a GE District Office or other suitable facility. The charged bat-
tery is then to be transported to the installation site of the AMX-II in the recommended shipping container.

If these pre-requisite steps have not been taken, the battery must be initially charged using the charger in
the AMX-11 unit. Follow the procedure given in Chapter 3, Section 6, “Battery”. This should be done
just prior to Section 4 “ Installing the Battery” of Chapter 4, Part Il.

A All battery information contained in this manual refers both to G.E. and Marathon NiCad cells.

411-4
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

1-6 Tools and Test Equipment

The following will be required for installation in addition to the standard serviceman's tool kit. The
following list does not include additional tools or test eguipment reguired if difficulty is encountered
during the installation which reguires trouble shooting or repair to the eguipment.

(1) Voltmeter, -/150/300 VAC, 25 to 500 Hz, accuracy 3/4 of 1% of full scale, Weston Instruments,
Inc., Cat. No. 433-1903010. Where this meter is not readily available, use the following instruments
with lower response on the square wave 60 Hz and the higher frequency (500 Hz) voltage. Volt-
meter, 0/150/300 VAC, 25-125 Hz, accuracy 3/4 of 1% of full scale, GE type AP-9, Cat. No.
50-20102RHRH or Weston Instruments, Inc., Cat. No. 433-1903009.

(2) Multimeter, Simpson Modei 260, Triplett Mode! 630, or equivalent (20,000 ohm/voit dc, 5,000
ohm/volt ac).

(3) Standard wrench (507A935G1) for GE type || cable terminals.

(4) Oscilloscope, Tektronix 564 or equivalent, dual trace, memory tape with algebraic addition feature
and X10 probes. (A Tektronix type 422 scope is satisfactory where troubleshooting is not required.)

(5) 1 gallon (3.8 litres) Diala AX transformer oil for H. V. Transformer or H. V. Divider.

(6) Can of 75-25 cleaning solvent and rags for cleaning. (Do not use for cleaning covers).

(7) Socket or open end wrench 1-1/16” hex for counterbalance adjustment.

(8) Calibrated H. V. Divider (C1515A) with two 5 ft. (1.5 m) H. V. Cables.

(9) Torpedo level.

(10) HEW Field Test Kit including Receptor Alignment Tool (RAT) 46-177371P1 and Standard Test
Absorber, 46-173632G1.

(11) Digital multimeter, Fluke Model 8000A, or equivalent.

(12) DC milliammeter 1.5/15/150, accuracy 1/2 of 1% of fuil scale, Weston Instruments, Inc., Model 931,
or equivalent.

(13) 14 x 17 (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) cassette and x-ray film.

(14) 500 ohm, 2 w potentiometer wired as variable resistor for set-up of battery condition meter.

(15) Torque wrench 0-4 ft.-lb. or 0-50 in.-ib. with 9/64” hex drive. Snap-on Tools Model TSQ-4 torque
wrench with TMA-4-1/2 9/64” hex drive or equivalent.

(16) Radiation meter (integrating dose type): Capintec Model 192, or equivalent.

(17) Fluoricon Test Patern for demonstration radiographs.

(18) Oscilloscope Trigger Circuit consisting of: (Refer to Illustration 4-1 1-31).
(1) 46-134441P1 Transformer 1:1.7 ratio
(1) Capacitor 33 ufd, 50v Electrolyte
(1) Resistor, 100K, 1/2-w comp.
a (19) 10 ohm, 100W adjustable resistor and shorting switch.
411-5
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS ΑΜΧ-Η X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

1-7 HEW Field Tests

Field Tests for HEW Compliance are inciuded in the installation procedures of Chapter 4, Part 11. These
are an elaboration of the generalized procedures given in Direction 13894 “Field Tests for HEW Compliance.”
The table below lists all pertinent HEW Field Tests for the AMX-II. Reference is given to the appropriate
test in Direction 13894, and the corresponding section in this Chapter. For a new installation, follow the
procedures given in the tables and record data on Form F3382 “System Field Tests for HEW Compliance“
and/or Form 3316 "PMS Data Record—Mobile Generator |.”
Reference
SM A0654E
Dir. 13894 Chapter 4,
Test Name Reference Part li Test Requirement Application Record Data

Appiication Test 5; Sections 1,2 Manual Collimator used On installation and F-3382
and Function Test Set W on Mobile Unit. replacement of
Collimator.

X-Ray Test 6 Section 11 Audibie tone required On installation and pre- F-3382
Control for x-ray exposure. ventive Maintenance calls.

Tube Test 23 Sections 11, MAS Accuracy On installation, pre- F-3316

Current— 12 MAS (MEDIAN) + VARIATION ventive maintenance calls,
Exposure and whenever repairing or
1 (+/-40% + .35 mas) +/- .27 mas
Time replacing x-ray tube, MA
Product 1.5 (+/-33% +.30 mas)+/-.27 mas control circuits, timer circuits
2 (+/-21% + .32 mas) .28 mas or H.V. components.
2.5 to4 (+/-14% + .39 mas) +/-.30 mas
5 to 8 (+/-8% + .40 mas) +/-.32 mas
10 (+/-7% + .40 mas)+/- .32 mas
12t0 300 -7% to 10%

Peak Test 21 Section 13 KVP Accuracy On installation, preventive F-3316

Tube maintenance calls, and F-3382
KVP
Potential whenever repairing or
(KVP) 50to 110 — (+(10 KVP +7%)) replacing battery, KVP
(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial control circuits,or H.V.
reading after first 20 components.
milliseconds of exposure.
50 to 95 (+(20 KVP +7%)
{-{5 KVP +7%)) of dial
reading during first 20
milliseconds of exposure.
100 to 110 = (+{25 KVP +7%))
(45 KVP *796)) of dial
reading during first 20
milliseconds of exposure.

Indirect Test 27-33 Section 14 19.6 V (RMS) at minimum On installation, preventive F- 3382
Test of Test Set F battery voltage of 110 VOC. maintenance calls, and when-
Collimator ever replacing collimator or
Illumination collimator lamp.

Collimator Test 27-33 Section 14 Misalignment of edges of On installation, preventive F-3382

Alignment; Test Set F Light Field and X-Ray Field maintenance cails, and when-
Light Field shall not exceed 1,8% of SID. ever repairing or repiacing
to X-Ray collimator or x-ray tube unit.
Field

Coitimator Test 27-33 Section 14 Field size indicators shall On instatlation, preventive F-3382
Alignment; Test Set F agree with actual field maintenance cails, or when-
Actual vs size within 1,8% of SID, ever repairing or replacing
indicated collimator.
X-Ray Field

inherent Test 13 Section 16 Half value layer-of useful On installation, and when- F-3316
Filtration; x-ray beam shail not be less ever replacing tube unit, F-3381
Diagnostic than 2.3 mm at 80 KVP. insert, collimator mirror, or
Source other absorption between
Assembly
411-6 source and patient.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 SM A0654E

1-8 Documents and Forms:

The following manuals, documents, and forms are required or referred to during the installation of the
АМХ-11.

Reference No. Description Source

SM A0654E Service Manual AMX-Il Furnished with Unit

OM A0654E Operating Manual AMX-II Furnished with Unit

Direction 13871A Application of G635 Silicone grease Furnished with Unit

Product Delivery 46-165600G 10 Basic AMX-II Furnished with Unit

Instructions 46-155750G3, Tube Unit |
46-177399G1 or 46-194759G1 Collimator

Product Locator Set of cards for each of the Furnished with Unit
Cards following components:
Set of 2 cards
46-165600G1 AMX-H Basic
Red Stripe & 46-155750G3 Tube Housing
Green Stripe in 46-125686G6 Tube Insert
Salmon envelope 46-150625G1 H.V. Transformer
46-177399G1 Sentry Collimator
46-138573G1 Extension Cylinder
(Optional)
Direction 13440B NCRP Report 33 with acknowledge- Furnished with Unit
ment card.

Direction 13777 AMX-II Technic Chart Furnished with Unit

Form, F3560 (3) Battery Service Log Form Furnished with Unit
Form, F3316 PMS Data Record, Mobile | Furnished with Unit

Direction 13894 System tests for HEW Compliance District

Form, F3382 System tests for HEW Compliance District

Form, F3382 System Field Tests for HEW District

Compliance

Direction 13861A Technical Publications Error Report District

Federal Form Installers Report, “Report of District

FD 2579 Assembly of a Diagnostic X-Ray
System.”

Direction 13788D "High Voltage Bleeder” District

SM-D1154A Maxiray 75, HRT, ORN-18 Tube Units District

(Microfiche Card
BL-9-1 C1 & C2)

411-7
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SECTION 2 INSPECTION AND UNPACKING

The unit as shipped is shown in Illustration 411-2. The Telescoping Arm is strapped down and locked to
prevent damage in shipment. The counterpoise spring in the vertical column has been adjusted to the as-
sembled weight of the Tube Unit and Collimator.

CAUTION: — DO NOT CUT THE TIE DOWN STRAPS, RELEASE THE TRANSPORT LATCH, OR
THE VERTICAL LOCK UNTIL SECTION 4. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT OR INJURY
TO PERSONNEL COULD OCCUR IF THE TELESCOPING ARM IS RELEASED
PREMATURELY.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation of “bad
order” placed by the delivering driver on all copies of the freight or express bill. If damage is of a concealed
nature, notify transportation agent as soon as possible to make an "inspection report of damage” but in
any event not later than 15 days after delivery. A transportation company usually will not pay a claim for
concealed damage if an inspection is not reguested within this 15 day period. Complete instructions
regarding claim procedure are found in section ""S“ of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.

If shipment was handled by moving van service - uncrated - call Traffic - Milwaukee immediately when
any damage is found. Do not attempt to call any local agent. At this time be ready to describe type of
damage, type of equipment, serial numbers and if possible the order number.

411-8
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

1. Remove the piastic cover from the AMX Unit.

Unwrap the cabies tied to the horizontal
Telescoping Arm, but do not release or unstrap
the Telescoping Arm. Open the cassette drawer
and inventory the furnished parts refering to
Section 1-4 and copies of the Product Delivery
Instructions.

2. Unpack the boxes containing Tube Unit,

Collimator, and accessory extension cylinder
assembly. inventory furnished parts refering
to Section 1-4 and Copies of the Product
Delivery Instructions.

Do not remove the two wooden shipping braces

fastened to the ends of the Tube Unit. They
will be removed after the Tube Unit is mounted
to the trunnion fork.

3. Check the Tube Unit for an oil leak or a broken

insert.

Look for tell-tale oil slick on the housing

indicating an oil leak. In the event an oil slick
“is found at any of the “O” ring seals, tighten
the seal. Make sure the leakage is stopped.

Rotate and angulate the Tube Unit and listen 21979-P10

for any noise which would indicate a broken ILLUSTRATION 4-11-2
insert. Using a flashlight examine the insert , - .
through the Lexan Window. ーー tad: COLLIMATOR INTERFACE
PLATE v,
NOTE: The Tube Unit is shipped with the
collimator interface plate pre-
aligned and secured to the Tube
Unit faceplate. Do not loosen any
of the (4) 10-32 unf Hex-HD screws
or move any of the excentrics which
secure the interface plate. İf the
plate is shifted it must be realigned
following the procedure of Chapter
4 part 1, section 3-3.

411-9
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

4. Do not unpack the battery cell groups at this

time. From a safety standpoint they should be
unpacked only when ready for installation in
the unit.

5. Save all packing materials until the installation

is completed and all parts accounted for.

| 세 ou

21981-P10
¡ILLUSTRATION 4-11-4

4-11-10
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A indicates Change
SEC. 3 TUBE UNIT INSTALLATION

A 1. Disassemble the two halves of the fork trun-

nions. Remove (2) 6-32 unc screws at the
bottom of the fork halves. Remove a 1/4-20
unc screw from the top of the left fork and
the fork lock from the top of the right fork.

NOTE: Save the 4 washers under each of

the three screws.

4 DO NOT USE
WEAR BANDS
21982-P10

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-5
2. Check that the trunnion contact surfaces of
the fork and Tube Unit are smooth, and free
of paint.

A 3. Apply a light coat of Waymat oil to the inside

surfaces of the lower trunnion halves and to the
external trunnion surfaces of the Tube Unit.

y <= <?
21983-P10
A 4. Carefully place the Tube Unit, x-ray port down,
in the lower trunnion halves. ILLUSTRATION 4-11-6

4-11-11
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-i X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

A 5. Install the left trunnion using one 6-32 unc and

1/4-20 unc screws removed in Step 1. Install (3). (3) 1/2” (12.7mm) WASHERS
of the (4) flat washers between the trunnion
halves. Tighten the two screws. , | `

д 6. Instali the right trunnion using (3) of the (4) flat

washers and the second 6-32 screw in the lower
hole. Install 1/4-20 une Rotation Lock in the
upper hole.

Check adjustment of the Fork Lock. With the x

(3) trunnion screws tight and the Rotation A /
Lock released, the Tube Unit should rotate и 1.
smoothly in the trunnion. When the Fork Lock и SON. |
is tightened the Tube Unit should be held secure- < lb
ly. If there is excessive drag when the Rotation
Lock is released add a fourth spacer washer, first
to both 8-32 unc screws, and if required to the (3) 3/8" (9.53mm) WASHERS
1/4-20 unc screw on the left trunnion. If trun- 21984011
nion is too loose with the rotation lock tightened, LEFT FORK
remove spacer washers. A ILLUSTRATION 4-11-7

Remove and discard the two wooden shipping

braces and hardware from the ends of the Tube
Unit.

Locate the (2) Tube Unit plastic end caps and

bag with (12) 8-32 unc x 1/4” Hex S.H.C.S.
Position the end caps so that the G.E. Trade-
mark is upright when x-ray port is down. In-
stall each with (6) 8-32 unc x 1/4” Hex S.H.C.S.

10. Rotate the Tube Unit so that its rear trim cover
is down, (high voltage cable horns project down).
Remove the rear fiberglass trim cover from the
Tube Unit. Remove (2) No. 10-32 unf 1/2”
B.H.M.S. at the edge of the x-ray port surface,
and (2) No. 10-32 unf P.H.M.S. in center of the
cover. Loosen the cable clamp located at the end
of the terminal strap beneath the trim cover.

(3) 3/8" (9.53 mm) WASHERS

21985011
RIGHT FORK
A ILLUSTRATION 411-8

4-11-12
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
1.981 SM A0654E

11. Locate the Tube Unit rotor cable. It is the 5

conductor cable with push-on terminals
bundled with the cathode H.V. cable and
collimator cable. Route the rotor cabie under-
neath the fork, through the hole in the Tube
Unit cover, and through the cable clamp.
Connect the leads at the terminal strip to
match the black, green and white stator leads.
Place the red and blue leads on unused terminals.
Tighten the cabie clamp and reinstall the rear
trim cover on the Tube Unit.

12, Rotate the Tube Unit so that the x-ray port is

down. Make a temporary dry installation of
the cathode H.V. cable to the Tube Unit. Do
not use silicone dielectric compound because
this cable installation is for preliminary checks
without high voltage. The Anode H.V. cable 21986-P 10
and collimator cable are not to be connected
at this time. ILLUSTRATION 4-11-9

411-13
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNİT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC.4 RELEASE OF HORIZONTAL ARM

CAUTION: THE VERTICAL COLUMN IS NOT PROPERLY COUNTERBALANCED AT THIS TIME. IT

WILL BE RELEASED IN THIS SECTION AND WILL BE ABOUT 30 LBS. (13.61 Kg) LIGHT.

1. Check that the Vertical Arm Lock is tight and

that the transport latch is engaged.

2. Carefully cut the two tie down straps around the

Telescoping Arm.

3. While holding the Telescoping Arm against rising,

release the lock and latch.

4. Relock the Telescoping Arm tightly once the

transport latch is released.

5. Release the Column Rotation Lock and rotate

the column 180°. Relock the column with the
Telescoping Arm projecting in front of the unit.

6. Again while holding the Telescoping Arm against

rising, release the vertical arm lock and lower the
Tube Unit so that it is approximately 3 ft. (0.9 m)
21987-P10
off the floor. Relock the arm tightly.

7. Release the Telescoping Arm Lock and press the

arm interlock button to extend the Telescoping
Arm. Pull out and discard the (4) rubber wedges
between the inner two sections of the Telescoping
Arm. Check smooth functioning of the Tele-
scoping Arm and then lock it extended a few
inches (150 mm).

8. Release the Yoke Rotation Lock and rotate the

yoke about the Telescoping Arm. Check for
functioning and detents every 90° of rotation.
Relock the Tube Unit with x-ray port up.

9. Record functional check No. 15 on F3316.

10. Carefully examine Tube Unit for air bubbles.

With port up look through x-ray window with
the aid of a flashlight, and gently rock Tube
Unit either side of horizontal. If an air bubble is
observed, Tube Unit must be removed and de- 2 “a
aired following procedure given in SM D1154A
21988-P10
before proceding.
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-11
NOTE: Leave the Tube Unit, port-up, for
filament and stator checks in section
8-2.

411-14
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 SM A0654E
A indicates Change

SECTION 5 CASSETTE DRAWER REMOVAL

1. Lift out rubber bottom liner of cassette drawer.

2. Loosen (4) screws, two in each front bottom

corner of drawer.

3. Slide each pivot block toward center of drawer

to disengage the pivot.

4. Remove drawer and set aside for later reinstal-

lation.

2
NOTE: Do not lose the spacers on each
pivot shaft.

5. Remove (3) 7/16 HHCS on top skirt of kick 21989-D12

panel and (2) 7/16 HHCS, one at each support
for the rear casters. Remove the kick panel.
& ILLUSTRATION 4-11-12
Remove the battery retainer plate. It is secured
©

by (4) 7/16 HHCS to the two side frame

members. Set aside with its hardware for later
reinstallation.

7. Pry off the cover over the 8 panel. The panel is

held with (4) friction fasteners. Use a padded
screwdriver so as not to mar the finish.

21990-P
10

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-13

411-15
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC. 6 BATTERY INSTALLATION

CAUTION: CHARGED BATTERIES: REVIEW THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS OF SECTION 1-3.

REMOVE RINGS, WATCHES, AND METALLIC OBJECTS FROM POCKETS. WEAR
SAFETY GLASSES.

NOTE: This procedure assumes that the battery has been precharged and electrolyte level adjusted
prior to the AMX- installation. If the battery requires charging it should be done following
the procedure of Chapter 3, Section 6.

1. Unpack the battery cell groups from their trans- REAR WALL
port containers and set in front of the AMX unit.
If Vent Cap Wrench is furnished with each cell
group, save the wrenches as they will be required
for servicing the battery.

2. Asshipped, each cell may have a yellow plastic

cap inserted in the top of the Vent Cap assembly.
Replace all the yellow caps with the red spray
caps furnished in a bag with the battery. The
red caps have three small holes for venting. Yel-
low caps are for shipping only.

3. Check that the Main Power Circuit Breaker on

the AMX, (6CV1) is OFF. Locate the two No. 6
Awg x 6" (152.4 mm) black leads in Bag No. 5, BOTTOM 21991-D10
and the four 46-154021P1 7-3/4" x 16-3/4" RIGHT SIDE
(220 mm x 413 mm) red insulator boards fur-
nished with the AMX. ILLUSTRATION 4-11-14

4. Fold back the mylar cover over the battery com-

partnent. Check that the loose insulating boards
are correctly positioned in the battery compart-
ment, and that the primary leads are clear of the ADDED PROTECTIVE
compartment. BARRIER
RED SPRAY CAP
5. Cut six (6) 1-1/2” x 3” (38.1 mm x 76.2 mm)
strips of insulation paper. Bend in half and
wedge between the first and second as well as
last and second last cell in each group, as shown
in Illustration 4-11-15. This will prevent damage
to battery if a washer or screw slips on connection
of battery leads.

| 21288-D10

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-15

4-11-16
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

6. Slide one 30-cell group in the right side of the

battery compartment. Slide it tight against the
right hand wall of the compartment to hold
the insulator board in piace. Do not push it all
the way in. Connect the lead out of the top
main circuit breaker that is labeled (+) to the
right front corner terminal of the cell group.

7. Slide another 30-cell group into the left side of

the battery compartment. Do not push it all
the way in. Connect the lead on the side of the
main power circuit breaker that is labeled (-) to
the front left corner terminal of the cell group.

8 Slide the remaining 30-cell group into the center e

of the battery compartment. Insert two 7-3/4” (4) 7.3/4 x 16-1/4
x 16-1/4" (220 mm x 413 mm) red insulator (220mm x 413mm)
21992-P10
boards (furnished) between the right and center RED INSULATOR BOARDS
and two others between the left and center cell
groups. These are to prevent the battery from
sliding around.

9. Two No. 6 Awg leads 6” (152.4 mm) long are

furnished. Use then to interconnect the left, ILLUSTRATION 4-11-16
right and center battery packs,

10. The battery terminals have flat sided washers as

part of the terminal hardware. Refer to Il. 411-15.
The flat side serves as a visual indicator during torqu-
ing. During initial screw engagement the washer ro-
tates, and upon tightening, rotation stops. This in-
dicates that the screw is tightened in the terminal
and not binding or bottoming when proper torque
is reached. Tighten all six terminals to 44 in/ Ibs.
(4.97 Nm) torque. Push Temflex sleeving over
solderless terminal lug.

11. Place the Mylar cover over the battery compart-

ment and reinstall the battery retainer plate.

411-17
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SECTION 7 H.V. TRANSFORMER

The H. V. Transformer has been shipped installed. The oil level has been checked and a cork gasket used to
seal the unit for shipment.

1. If there is evidence that the transformer has

leaked oil it will have to be removed from the
unit in order to locate and repair the leak and COVER CAP
to reset the oil level. Otherwise proceed to
CORK GASKET
Step 2.
(DISCARD)

2. Remove the terminal cover over the H. V.

Transformer primary leads. It is mounted with INNER COVER
(DO NOT REMOVE)
(4) No. 10-32 unc x 1/2” B.H.M.S. Set the
cover and hardware aside for later installation.

3. Check that the leads to 7P1 and 7P2 are dis-

connected and taped.

4. Remove the threaded cover cap from the oil

filler hole. Do not attempt to remove the inner
cover. Discard the cork gasket located inside 21993-D10
the cover cap and reinstall the cover cap.

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-17

4-11-18
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change
SEC. 8 PRELIMINARY ELECTRICAL CHECKS

The purpose of this section is to make preliminary non x-ray checks of Control Transformer and Tube Unit
before installing collimator.

NOTE: The battery which: was precharged before installation should have a terminal voltage of at
least 120 volts. If the battery voltage falls into the RED “LOW” region during the installation
procedure, temporarily charge the battery per Section 18 for approximately one hour before
proceeding.

81 Calibrate Battery Condition Meter, 5M1

NOTE: If battery was recently charged, the 4A1 Board should be allowed to cool before starting this
procedure. Remove cover and open Operators Panel and cool for a minimum of 15 minutes.

Initial Condition: | 8 i 9 | io

@ Main Circuit Breaker and Keyed Switch

一OFF

e Battery installed and charged

val —
СНАЯСЕ|
e Remove x-ray control cover. Leave cover aus |
OFF i

off for remainder of tests. (60400

| 3781-28
4AiR9
470
instrumentation:
4 a. Connect 0.5K, 2 watt potentiometer in A
А!

series with Gray lead, to 3TB1-26. See /M

11. 4-11-18. $37
ㅠ- 어
.
44107 SD one
2N697\ „ЛУ 230 14
b. Connect the digital voltmeter across 4A 1-2 (+)
and 4A 1-11 (-). Set on 200 VDC scale.

c. Arrange test leads so that Operator's Panel can

be closed without causing shorts. sma?

1. Close Operator's Panel and mechanically zero 5M1. B >

4AICR22
& 141773
2. Open Operator's Panel. Turn main circuit breaker Eyi
and keyed switch ON. Adjust 0.5K potentiometer MM —
for 110+/-1V on Digital Voltmeter. Allow warm- wan
up for 15 minutes. | 25
| E
3. Open Operator’s Panel and adjust 4A2R 10 for 5M1
reading on black mark between red and green bands. 一

4 Carefully close Operator's Panel and check 5M1. Fs

5. Turn main circuit breaker and keyed switch OFF. + ーー を F

Disconnect D.V.M. and 0.5K potentiometer leads. 22104021
Reconnect Gray lead to 3TB1-26.

6. Record Battery Circuit calibration on PMS Form ILLUSTRATION 4-11-18

3316, Functional Check No. 9.

411-19
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

82 Check X-Ray Tube Filament and Stator

Initial Conditions:
[SMALL FILAMENT
>
“a
e Check that 7TB1-P1 and 7TB1-P2 are dis-
connected at the HV Transformer and the
‘ends taped (230 V may appear at these ends).

1. Turn main circuit breaker and keyed switch ON.

2. Depress the handswitch Rotor Button while

looking into the x-ray tube window. Only the
small filament is connected, the large filament is
not used in this unit. If the filament does not
glow, check for improper filament circuit or HV .
cable connection. The small filament is the one ~ i_
to the left when viewed from the anode end -
through the x-ray window.

3. Again depress the handswitch Rotor Button while и 2 21994910

looking into the x-ray tube window. The x-ray |
tube anode shou!d accelerate to a stable speed ILLUSTRATION 4-11-19
within the 2-1/2 second interval before the READY
light glows. If rotation does not occur, check for
improper connection of the stator cable.

4. Release the Rotor Button. The anode should SANIĞI

coast for at least 10 seconds before stopping. If
not, the bearings in the x-ray tube are likely to
seize and the tube should be replaced.

5. With the Operator's Panel open, again depress

the Rotor Button. Note that after 2-1/2 seconds
the ready light lights and that the neon bulb on
the 3A1 board (3A1161) lights during the 2-1/2
second interval. This indicates that the shut-off
capacitor for the 500 Hz inverter switch is charged. #

21995-P10

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-20

411-20
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

8-3 Check Filament and Rotor interlocks

3A2R 14 342-19
1. Disconnect filament transformer primary lead ANA
sa
at 3TB1-18 and tape end of lead. wie
3A2V13 x
PLSBI
2. Turn main circuit breaker and keyed switch ON. L

342-23

SENSOR FOR
3. Press Rotor Button. Ready Lamp should not FILAMENT
INTERLOCK
light at end of 2-1/2 second interval. If it does CIRCUIT
light, check functioning of 3A2V13, Schematic
Reference 27,B. TO J3-! TO J4-1
SEE 8i,F SEE 8I,C xs

772
4. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch OFF. Fil AMENT FIL AMENT
TRANSFORMER
SECONDARY Wi4
(96 TURN}
5. Reconnect filament lead to 3TB1-18. SEE X-RAY TUBE
АТ 69,Е

xc
6. | Disconnect and tape white stator lead at 3TB1-39.
3A2RIS
7. Repeat Steps 2, 3 and press Rotor Button. If SIK

Ready Lamp lights, check functioning of 3A2V5, 22102-D10

Schematic Reference 24,F.
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-21
8. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch OFF.
Reconnect Stator lead to 3TB1-39.

9. Record on F3316. Functional Check No. 1 and

No. 2.
wer acral Fe Maron
TO

NOTE: Leave the Tube Unit, port up, for

installation of the collimator in the W8-A

next section.
BLKÍ «es
3781-28

342-27

ТО 44-3
SEE 91,€

=
FOR ROTOR 34284
INTERLOCK "IO 152
CIRCUITS W9-A

TO Ji- 了 ο |
SEE 81,F 33223

L. X-RAY TUBE -I
STATOR POWER
22103-D10

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-22

41-21
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

SECTION 9 COLLIMATOR INSTALLATION

NOTE: BE CAREFUL! Bumping the fingers projecting from the top of the collimator could bend
them out of alignment.

9-1 Mounting Collimator

a |. With the tube unit, port up, carefully place the

collimator into the interface plate. Position so
that the mounting screw holes line up. Attach
the collimator to the interface plate with the
(3) 10-24 unc x 3/4” hex soc hms. Use the
9/64 T-handle Allen wrench furnished with
the collimator (46-165137P1).

2. Rotate the tube unit and collimator for port

down x-ray beam and raise the horizontal
telescoping arm for a suitable working height.

9-2 Connect Collimator Cable

1. | Unscrew and push the Rotational Detent Button

on the right side of the collimator. Rotate the
collimator 90° to the left for access to the
connector housing.

2. Remove the connector housing cover at the rear

of the Collimator. It is held by two screws.

3. Route the collimator cable under the fork

trunnion and connect the plug to the collimator
jack.

NOTE: The jack screws must be alternately

taken up a few turns at a time until
the plug is drawn up tightly and
evenly to the socket.

4. Reinstall the connector housing on the rear of

the collimator.

21997-P10

4-11-22
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 . SM A0654E

9-3 Collimator Functional Checks and Modifications

FIELD LIGHT ROTATIONAL DETENT
1. If an extension cone is part of the system check BUTTON PLUNGER KNOB
that it slides into the tracks on bottom of the (ON RIGHT HAND SIDE)
collimator and locks securely in place. a

2. If installation requires metric field size scale, | TT

perform the scale label modification of Chapter CALIBRATED
4, Part I, Section 4-1. “ . SCALE
DRUM
3. The field light timer is factory set for 15 to 20
seconds. İf the user desires a shorter time setting, TRACKS FOR
refer to Adjustment Procedure of Chapter 4, EXTENSION
Part |, Section 4-2. CYLINDER
16942-P10
MEASURING BLADE CONTROL
TAPE KNOBS

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-25

411-23
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
10-377 | SM A0654E

9-4 Vertical Column and Horizontal Arm Balance

NOTE: As all components are now mounted on the vertical column, the counterbalancing should
| be checked. If an extension cylinder is included with the system, counterbalancing should
be checked with the extension cylinder off the unit.

1. Remove the rectangular cover at the

rear base of the column. It is held
with two screws on the sides.

2. Check that the counterpoise cable is

riding in the cable guide. If not, raise
the vertical carriage to the top of its
travel and use a smooth surfaced tool,
so as not to damage the cable, to place
ES COUNTERPOISE
the cable in the groove of the guide.
CABLE GUIDE
3. Check the counterbalance. !t is prop-
erly adjusted when it requires the same
force (about 5 to 13 lbs) (2.3 to 5.9 kg)
to move the arm up or down. The Tel-
escoping Arm should balance at any
point except the top most 2” (50.8 mm)
and bottom most 10” (254 mm) of
vertical travel.

4. Counterbalancing adjustment maybe re-

quired. Use a socket wrench to turn the 1-
1/16” inch nut at the top of the column. 23570-P10
Earlier units require that the trim cover be ILLUSTRATION 4-11-26
removed from the top of the column. It is
secured with four 4-40 unx c 1/4” FMS. 1 1/26" HEX
5. Turn the 1-1/16" nut in the clockwise
direction to increase the upward counter- TRIM COVER
balancing force. Typically, about 40
turns will be required to counterbalance
the column.

6. After counterbalancing the column ге-

install the trim cover at the top of the
column, if removed, and the access cover
over the cable guide at the bottom of the TOP OF
column. COLUMN

21999-010
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-27

411-24
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 | _ 684 A0654E

Place a torpedo level on the large section of the

horizontal Telescoping Arm. Then compare level
of the arm with level of the floor. With the
Telescoping Arm projecting in front of the unit TORPEDO
the arm should be level reasonably with the floor LEVEL
so that the arm does not coast in or out. If not,
shims must be added or removed between the
telescoping Arm and the vertical carriage.

Two 46-165626P1 shims are furnished

in Bag
No. 1.

If adjustment is required, raise the vertical car-

riage to the top of its travel and securely lock
the carriage. TORPEDO
LEVEL
Loosen the two 5/16 x 18 unc nuts at the back
of the carriage.

10. Have an assistant lift on the end of the horizontal

Telescoping Arm to overcome the weight of the
tube unit and collimator.
22000-D10
11. insert or remove 46-165626P1 shims as required ILLUSTRATION 4-11-28
to make the arm horizontal.

12. Retighten the two 5/16” x 18 unc nuts and re-

check that the Telescoping Arm is level with the
floor.

CARRIAGE

46-165626P1
SHIM

COLUMN

22001-010
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-29

4-11-25
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC. 10 CONNECT H. V. DIVIDER

. COVER WITH
Check that the main circuit breaker and keyed 1/8” (3.175 mm)
switch are OFF. . LEAD & CLOSE
р h be ith the hori COLLIMATOR
osition the tube unit, port up, with the horizon- 10 FT. (3.0m) BLADED
tal column about 2 feet (0.6 m) off the floor. HV CABLE N X-RAY
TUBE
Remove the Cathode H. V. Cable from the Tube UNIT
Unit (Installed dry in Section 3). If necessary,
remove the last cable tie around the cathode HV TRANSFORMER
MODEL 46-150625G1
H. V. cable, stator cable, and collimator cable.

Connect the unit H. V. cables to the H. V. CATHODE HV

Divider and Tube Unit. Use transformer oil in CABLE
the cable recepticals of the H. V. Divider and
silicone insulating compound, G635, at the tube X10 PROBES i
unit. Apply silicone compound per Direction EDS NDE Ol Hi
13871A. Follow standard procedures for installing E CH 2
the grounding wave washer, and rubber gasket GROUND AMX 164 OSCIL | OSCOPE
at each H. V. cable connection. AND SCORE (dual trace with algebraic addition)
POWER CORD OBSERVE SCOPE FROM
Do not connect the scope to the H. V. Divider LEAD SHIELDED AREA
at this time. 18738-012

6. Reconnect transformer primary leads at 7P1 and ILLUSTRATION 4-11-30

7P2. Install cover over primary leads on trans-
former. Be sure that plastic grommet is snapped
in place in cover cutout.

Close collimator blades and tape a sheet of 1/8”

(3.175 mm) lead over collimator window. Cover
tube unit (primarily cathode end) with a lead
apron or place lead screens for additional radia-
tion protection.

4-11-26
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SECTION 11 ADJUSTMENT OF MA STABILIZER

The filament and MA regulator circuits were initially adjusted during factory test. Readjustment on instal-
lation is reguired because of tolerance variations between individual controls, transformers, and tube units.

initial Conditions: 3J4-29 3781-13 34-23 24424 p-—

3
C
a. Main circuit breaker and keyed switch OFF.
+ 3AICR8
TE Finsoso |
b. Tube unit shielded and x-ray port blocked.
JI-25
c. H. V. Divider and five foot cables connected. LS 一
3K3 3 SEC.
Instrumentation: TIMED OPEN
>
a. Open x-ray control panel. Place 3A2 Board on D

extender card.

Meter battery voltage: Connect DVM (0-200

VDC) across 3TB1-27 (+) and 3TB1-5 (-).

Meter tube current: Remove the jumper (with 4 J4-35

banana plugs) from MA+ and MA- terminals
of panel 3. Connect 0-150 DCMA Meter E

(+/-1/29 accuracy) to MA + and MA -.

Meter filament transformer primary voltage. 33 yfd
50 MFD, ¡+
Connect 0-150 VAC iron vane meter across — 3TBI-4 ~
arsi-4
3TB1-18 and 3TB1-12.
SCOPE YEL Lu SRN
Connect oscilloscope to observe MA stabilizer EXT | P HAND SWITCH
TRIG. 中 sal] X-RAY PUSH
signal: ο-φο BUTTONS F
GND -
For 564 Scope y
t leo° lex
BLK 8TSI-5
CHI. PROBE: Top of 3A2C55 (+) 46-13444/P! stanu 二
GND CLIP: Bottom of 3A2C55(-) 5
344-5 3-7
394-19
VERT.: 0.2/DIV. x 10 Probe
HORIZ.: 20 MS/DIV Γ 83 T 84
22105-020
TRIG.: EXT, DC, + using trigger
circuit of Illustration 4-11-31
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-31
OR

TRIG: INT, DC, T, SETPOINT

(trigger circuit, not necessary)

For 422 Scope

CHI Top of 3A2C55 (+)

GND CLIP Bottom of 3A2C55 (-)
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
1-981 À Indicates Change SM A0654E

1. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch to ON. is obtained with the trace, readjust 3A2R34,
2. Check battery voltage. It should be greater than per step 5, then readjust 3A2R30 to obtain the
110 VDC with the control ON. A trace. Repeat procedure until the center
trace is obtained when the x-ray tube current
is 100 MA with battery voltage above 110 VDC.
3. Select 50 KVP and 10 MAS. Make an exposure
and observe that the x-ray tube MA meter “kicks”
9. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF.
up scale. 10. Disconnect only the following instrumentation.
NOTE: Tone “beep” and x-ray on light a. Scope connections across 3A2C55
during exposure. b. Filament transformer primary voltage at
3TB1-12 and 3TB1-18.
4. Select 80 KVP, 200 MAS. c. Replace 3A2 Board in card rack.
5. & Take an exposure and read the MA meter 11. Check off F3316 Functional Checks No. 12 and
by»

If it is not 100, adjust 3A2R34 to obtain No. 14.

an x-ray tube current of 100 MA +/- 1.0 MA
(CW to increase MA).
NOTE: Do not make more than one ex- ri SHORTING SWITCH το
posure per minute to stay within 6CBI-8 2TBI-3
tube ratings.

6. Make another exposure and read the filament 10.1 SLIDER _ INITIALLY
transformer primary voltage across 3TB1-12 100 W SET FOR 10-OHMS
and 3TB1-18. Record this voltage.
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-32A
7. For the next check and adjustment, battery
must be at full charge.

With power off, locate leads at main power

circuit breaker 6CB1-B (heavy lead). Remove
leads from 6CB1-B and connect a 10 ohm,
100 Watt adjustabie resistor and shorting
switch as shown in Illustration 4-11-32A
between the leads and 6CB1-B. Turn power
on but DO NOT MAKE EXPOSURES. Press
rotor button only. Depress switch on device
shown in Illustration 4-11-32A and read voltage
on DVM and adjust resistor tap to obtain
VTTTTÝTÝT
+444

90 VDC + 5V. With rotor depressed, adjust

3A2R30 to obtain the filament voltage 1
recorded earlier. Recheck this voltage with 21812-P10
the 10 ohm resistor shorted (switch released).
If difference in voltage is more than + 1 volt, ILLUSTRATION 4-11-32
adjust 3A2R27. Repeat checks and adjustments B Trace: Filament voltage too high and MA
until change in voltage is less than + 1V with regulator pulling down or filament voltage normal
resistor in or out. Remove switch and resistor but regulator pulling down improperly: Adjust
and replace leads on 6CB1-8. 3A2R30 CCW.

Observe MA stabilizer signal on scope to verify A Trace: Filament voltage correct and MA
that filament voltage and adjustments in MA regulator adjusted correctly.
regulator are optimum. Use 80 KVP, 16 MAS.
Settings of 3A2R30 and 3A2R34 are correct C Trace: Filament voltage too low and MA
if the A scope trace is obtained when the x-ray regulator pulling up or filament voltage normal
tube MA meter reads 100 MA during an ex- but regulator pulling up improperly. Adjust
posure of step 5. If more or less than 100 MA 3A2R30 CW.
4-11-28
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
8-3179 SM A0654E

SECTION 12. PRELIMINARY KVP, TIMER, AND LOAD CHECKS

Initial Conditions:

a. Circuit breaker and keyed switch OFF. =

b. Tube unit shielded and x-ray port blocked

(from Section 10).
НН
Hi |i
c. H. V. Divider connected (from Section 10). il ply 1444

Instrumentation: | +
a. Connect scope to H. V. Divider, refer to I
Mustration 4-11-30. 그 上 A

Scope to be grounded through line cord

and scope ground connected to AMX-110 25282-P10
chassis. Use external trigger circuit per ,
iNustration 4-11-31. Or INT, DC, +. ILLUSTRATION 411-33
b. Digital voltmeter across battery voltage Timer: 80 KVP, 10 MAS
(from Section 11). У = 20 KV/DIV
H = 10 MS/DIV
_ Xray tub t itored by 0-150 DCMA TRIG = Ext. Trigger Circuit or Int, DC, T
é meter (from ‘Section 11 or Y NOTE: Deep discharge pulses as shown above
” appear on scopes with faster writing rates.
12-1 Timer Check And Adjustment Older scopes wil! appear as in Ill. 4-11-34.

1. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch ON. +

4,82. Select 80 KVP, 10 MAS. Make an exposure and +
record exposure duration from scope waveform - +
measure time interval at 75% of maximum KVP
(60 KVP for a selected 80 KVP). See Ill. 4-11-33. teto ed eo

4,43. Select 80 KVP, 100 MAS. Make another ex-

posure and note exposure duration on scope. | 3
See (If. 4-11-34. 3

4. Ifnecessary adjust 3A1R7 for exposure interval | | ? | | |

within +/-2% of .10 second at 10 mAs and 21514P1Q
1.0 seconds at 100 mAs.
a ILLUSTRATION 4-11-34
5. Select 80 kVp, 1 mAs. Make another exposure .
and only if necessary, adjust 3A1R9 for Timer: 80 KVP, 100 MAS
exposure interval of 10 MS. V = 20KV/DIV
H = 200 MS/DIV
A6. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF. TRIG = Ext. Trigger Circuit

411-29
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM AO654E

12-2 Back-Up Timer Check

1. Temporarily disconnect the MAS selector lead

‘ at 3TB1-21 and tape the lead.

2. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch ON.

2.83, Select 50 KVP, and MAS, and make an exposure.

Measure exposure duration with watch or on
scope KVP waveform with horizontal time of
0.5 sec/div.

4. Exposure should be terminated within 3-1/2

seconds by back-up time delay relay, 3K3.
21815-P10
5. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF.
Reconnect MAS switch lead to 3TB1-21. ILLUSTRATION 4-11-35
6. Record Data
Back-up Timer: 50 КУР
V = 20KVP/DIV
а. F3382 HEW Test No. 25.
H = 500 MS/DIV
TRIG = Ext. Trigger Circuit
b. 3316 Functional Check No. 5 and 13.
12-3 Battery Load Voltage Check

1. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch ON.

sa 2. Make an exposure at 80 KVP, 200 MAS and

note battery voltage drop between standby,
stator load, and x-ray load.
Ra

3. Voltage drop from standby to stator load should

be from 1 to 1.5 volts and from standby to x-ray
load up to 20.6 to 24 volts. If voltage drop is in
excess of 25 volts check tightness of primary
terminal and connections to battery. |f necessary
check each cell group voltage under x-ray load
to locate and correct cause of excessive voltage
drop.

“a 4. Make a series of exposures at 2 MAS, from 80 21816-P10

to 110 KVP. Observe scope waveform for signs
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-36
of arcing or transients.
80/90/100/110 KVP; 2 MAS
5. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF. Do
V = 20KVP/DIV
not disconnect any test equipment.
H = 2MS/DIV
TRIG = Ext. Trigger Circuit

411-30
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

SEC. 13 X-RAY KVP AND MAS ACCURACY

NOTE: The tests of Sections 13, 14, 15 and 16 may be done in any order, except that the check of
KVP and MA accuracy (Section 13) must be done at a battery voltage between 110 and
120 VDC. Battery voltage is measured with the main circuit breaker, 6CB1, and operator's
keyed switch, 5S1, ON and after the battery has recovered for at least one minute after
completion of the last x-ray exposure.

すすす でてイ すす すす すす す で すす
4
4
Initial Conditions:

tt
a. | Battery voltage between 110 and 120 VDC.

deeded
b. MA adjusted for 100 MA with H. V. Divider
and 5 ft. H. V. Cables connected (Section 11).

|
+

+
+
+
+
+
dd ddd k+
+
instrumentation:

tt
a. Measure battery voltage with D.V.M. (Section
11).

b. Measure x-ray tube current with DCMA Meter

(Section 11). 21817-P10
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-37. 80 KVP;4 MAS
c. Scope connected to H. V. Divider (Sec. 12).
V:20KV/DIV; H:5MS/DIV TRIG: EXT. CKT.

1. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch ON.

+ 4 すす すす すす すす すす すす
Measure battery voltage. Battery voltage will

4 ο...
depend on state of charge. For this test it must
be between 110 and 120 voits.
υπνο νωυιυνυ ου νυν νυν ον ουν νυν νυν υ eği
++ + イマ す すそ て イ rrrretr
4.4 Make an x-ray exposure at 80 KVP, 4 MAS.

一一
Measure KVP. Compare scope waveform with
illustration at right. KVP should be 80 (+(10
KVP +5%) (-(5 KVP +5%). Check durina last
20 milliseconds of exposure as MA stabilizer
does affect KVP during first 20 milliseconds.
21818-P10
4.43 Wait one minute from step 2. Measure battery
voltage, then make a second exposure at 80 ILLUSTRATION 4-11-38 50 KVP;4 MAS
KVP, 200 MAS. Measure MA and record. Bat- 3
PPすす YY すす

tery voltage should be between 110 and 120 | 4

+

volts. MA should be 100 MA +/- 1.

4. Wait one minute between exposures then repeat

すす すす すす で
ААА

steps 2 and 3 at 50 KVP and 110 KVP. KVP

should be within (+(10 KVP +5%) (-(5 KVP + ыы 시
イイ イイ イイ マサ イイ て すす すす て
youu an
マイ イイ イマ すす てて て サイ イ
上
E

$
+
7

5%)) of selected value. MA should be within 95

すす すす すす すす すす すそ す
» ass.

k
and 105 MA at a battery voltage between 110
Abed bd

and 120 volts.

bd

ný
|

21819-P10
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-39. 110 KVP; 4 MAS

4-11-31
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 . SM A0654E

5. Calculate KVP (MIN) and KVP (MAX) for 50, KVP (MIN) = KVP (measured) x 110
80 and 110 KVP based on measured KVP and Bat. Volt (Measured)
battery voltage.
KVP = KVP (measured) x ーーーーー
120
MAX
m Bat. Volt (Measured)

6. Record data on F3382, Test 19. Refer to III. 4-11-40. Calculate KVP deviation. KVP-(MIN) and KVP
(MAX) must be within (+)10 KVP +5%) (-(5 KVP +5%) of each selected value. If KVP is too low,
disconnect tap 4 of 1T1 from 2TB1-P1L and replace it with tap 3 of 1T1. Repeat accuracy test.
7. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF. Remove H.V. Divider and scope. Connect 10 ft. H.V.
cables to tube unit using standard procedure. Replace the cable tie-wrap on the cathode H.V. cable.
Dc not disconnect tube current test meter.

.. 8. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch ON. Make an exposure at 80 KVP, 200 MAS. Readjust 3A2R34,
| if required for MA value of Step 3. Readjustment of 3A2R30 may be required to compensate for re-
moval of H. V. Divider and 5 foot cables.

9. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF. Remove the tube current test meters and reinstall the MA
(+; to MA (-) jumper. Do not disconnect the battery voltage DVM.
10. Optional MAS test. (Not required for field installation) may be performed by inserted MAS meter
(FLUKE 8000A/W MAS option) into the MA + MA - terminals of panel 3. With battery voltage in
the green band, record 10 consecutive exposures. Compare dial selection of MAS to reading on cal-
ibrated MAS meter. Readings should be within accuracies as stated in Chapter 4, Section 1.
TEST 19 INDIRECT TEST FOR ASSURANCE OF LINEARITY

TUBE UNIT _46-/65 780 G4

Serial No. 48725

x YES O no Requirements of Sec. 19-2 (KVP Accuracy) have been met.

O Yes 加 “No Requirements of Sec. 19-2 (Linearity) have been met.

LJ NOT APPLICABLE

The following data table substantiates the above:

KVP (MIN) КУР (Мах)

а ВАТТ МА | МА KVP
SELECT EK VOLTS MA LM ~ CALC] A. CALC) A.
80 116 101 | +! 81.5 773 |-2.7 8431 +43

50 114 98 | -2 48.0 46.3 | -3,7 505 #05

110 13.5 102 | +2 108.0 / の .9|-3. の М2 \+4,2

|
ーー |

TR 一

F 3382 774 SHEET 5 OF 11

PRINTED IN U.S.A,
22002-D10
ILLUSTRATION 411-40

411-32
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SECTION 14 COLLIMATOR FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

General

The collimator blade and shutter assemblies have been factory aligned. The following adjustments, however,
should be checked and readjusted if necessary. Note: The mirror should NEVER be moved.

14-1 Cross Hair Position Check and Adjustment

Initial Conditions:

Main power circuit breaker - ON

X-ray generator standby switch - ON
Battery charge indicator green band
Charger cord disconnected

Position tube unit and collimator to project

light field on smooth surface such as a tile floor
at 40” (1.016 m) SID. Darken the room and
open the collimator blades.

Press the Field Light button on the collimator.

Field Light should energize and remain on for
15 to 20 seconds unless modified per Chapter
4, Part |, Section 3-2. Light pattern should be
of uniform brightness (no shadows or blotches)
with sharply defined edges, and approximately
squarely with the floor.

Slowly move each blade set toward the closed

position while observing the light pattern. The
illuminated area on the floor should show equal
rectangles of light on either side of the cross-
hair shadows as each set of blades is moved
22003-D20
toward the closed position.
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-41
If adjustment is necessary, proceed as follows:

a. Slightly loosen the two rear screws in each

cone track.

b. Slide the plastic window with the fingertips

or tap the frame with a screwdriver until
alignment is satisfactory.

c. Retighten thecone track screws.

411-33
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

14-2 Extension Cylinder (Optional Accessory) Alignment Check

Initial Conditions:

Same as Section 14-1.

1. Slide the Extension Cylinder into the tracks at

the bottom of the collimator until the cylinder
latch snaps into the slot on the righthand track.

2. Darken the room and energize the field light. The

illuminated area on the cassette should show
ecual sectors of light on either side of the cross-
hair shadows.

3. If adjustment is necessary, proceed as follows:

a. Loosen the eight cone track screws.

b. Shift and/or shim the tracks as necessary. CS

|ン
ο. Retighten the screws. 22004020

d. Recheck the alignment.

4. Remove the Extension Cylinder by pressing the ILLUSTRATION 4-11-42

latch.

CAUTION: SOME OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRE THAT RADIOGRAPHS BE TAKEN

TAKEN. OBSERVE RADIATION SAFETY RULES. A LEAD PROTECTIVE SCREEN,
LEAD APRON UNIT OR OTHER PROTECTIVE MEDIUM SHOULD BE USED TO
AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE.

411-34
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E

14-3 Large Field Size Check ce

г

initial Conditions: ANODE CА a

Same as Section 14-1. |

1. Position a loaded 14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) cassette

under the collimator (17” (43.2 cm) dimension transverse (1.016 m)
to the axis of the tube unit). Using the collimator meas- 40”
uring tape set the source-to-image distance at 40” (1.016 m).

2. Adjust the blades to yield a field size of 14” x 17” (35.5

cm x 43.2 cm). Place a coin on the cassette to identify
the anode front corner of the x-ray field.

& 3. Make a 50 KVP, 1 MAS exposure and develop the film.

n (35.5 cm) 러
14”
4. If cutoff in the transverse direction is observed, lead 22005-D20
finger spacing of the collimator should be checked. Refer
to Chapter 4, Part |, Section 5-4. ILLUSTRATION 4-11-43

14-4 Field Lamp Voltage Check

To meet HEW requirements, the voltage at the collimator lamp socket must be at least 19.6 VAC (RMS)
at a minimum battery voltage of 110 VDC. This is an indirect test of illumination level.

NOTE: Because the lamp voltage is a square rather than sine wave, the voltage measured with a Fluke
8000A Digital Meter will be greater than the true RMS value. Lamp voltage can be measured
with a true RMS calculating digital meter such as a Weston/Schlumburger, Mode! 4445. How-
ever, do not use an iron-vane AC voltmeter because it will overload the lamp circuit.
. Lu. 6-32 x 1/4”
Inital Conditions: FRONT UNC HEX SOC.
NAMEPLATE SET SCREWS
Same as Section 14-1.

Instrumentation:

Battery Voltage: digital voltmeter from section 13.

1. Remove the Blade Control Knobs and the

collimator front nameplate.

a. Loosen two 6-32 unc x 1/4” hex soc. set screws

at the top front of the collimator frame.

b. Tilt the nameplate forward enough to clear

the knob shafts and lift out. REMOVE BLADE
- CONTROL KNOBS

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-44

4-11-35
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

2. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch ON. No Load | Min. Collimator Lamp Voltage (VAC)
Measure and record no-load battery voltage using Batt. Voit. RMS Fluke 8000A
the digital voltmeter across 3TB1-27 (+) and
3TB1-5 (-) 128 22.2 24.3
126 22.0 24.1
3. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch OFF. 124 21.7 23.8
Disconnect digital voitmeter from 3TB1-27 and 122 21.4 23.5
3TB1-5. Turn circuit breaker and keyed switch 120 21.1 23.1
ON. 118 20.7 22.7
116 20.3 22.3
4. With the field light energized measure and record 114 19.9 21.9
the voltage across the lamp socket terminals 112 19.5 21.5
using the digital voltmeter on the 200 VAC 110 19.0 21.0
scale.

5. Compare no-load battery voltage with collimator

lamp voltage. To provide required illumination,
lamp voltage must be no less than value listed in
the table. Too high a voltage will reduce lamp
life,

6. If necessary, shift secondary taps on 8TB1 to

provide required collimator lamp voltage. Care- 29 ㆍ | 30 | τι
fully pry off cover over the 8 panel. BRN/WHT

The secondary of 8T1 is factory connected to

the Red Tap. A shift to an adjacent tap will
change lamp voltage by approximately 0.5 v 405! con
rms. Select the lowest voltage tap of 8T1 that LIGHT c
provides at least the minimum voltage reguired.
BUT NOT MORE THAN 1 V OVER.

7. Replace nameplate and knobs after verifying 4P2-A

that the collimator lamp is operating in the 21279-040

proper voltage range. |
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-45
8. Record collimator lamp voltage and battery
voltage on F-3382, Test 27-33, Set F.

411-36
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I1 X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC. 15 COLLIMATOR BEAM ALIGNMENT CHECKS

To meet HEW Requirements:

a. The total misalignment of the edges of the light field with the respective edges of the x-ray field along
either the length or width shall not exceed 1.8% of SID when the field is perpendicular to the x-ray
beam.

Field size indicators of length and width on collimator shall each agree with actual x-ray field size at
the receptor to within 1.8% of SID when beam axis is perpendicular to the plane of the film.

initial Conditions:

@ Main power circuit breaker - ON

© X-ray generator keyed switch - ON
e Battery charge indicator - Green band
@ Charger cord retracter

Test Consitions:

e 14% x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm)

© Vertical x-ray beam
e 40° (1.016 m) and 72” (1.83 m) SID

Load a 14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) cassette МОТЕ: The measuring tape built into the
and place on floor. Position tube unit and col- collimator housing is used to meas-
limator for a vertical x-ray beam at a SID of 40” ure source-to-image distance (SID).
(1.016 m). Use collimator light to carefully The correct SID is indicated by
center x-ray beam perpendicularly on Cassette. having the bottom of the collimator
housing even with the marking on
Carefully adjust collimator field indicators to a the tape which corresponds to the
common field side smatler than the cassette-use desired source-to-image distance.
12” x 12” (304.8 x 304.8 mm) for a 14” x 17” For accurate measurements, have
(35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) cassette. Place a coin on the tape tab on the end of the tape
the cassette in the anode-front corner of the light straight down, not perpendicular
field for reference. to the tape.

1 |
|

io
{| À
407/72"
! | 1016m/1.83m
“+ 12" (304.8 mm)
COIN

22006-020
(304.8 mm)
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-46

4-11-37
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377

“o
Assemble and attach Receptor Alignment Tool
(RAT) to collimator using RAT holding fixture.

Using collimator light, note and record where

edges of light field appear on RAT grid pattern.

Expose and develop film (recommend 4 MAS

at 50 KVP for par speed film with medium
|
screens at 40” (1.016 m) and 16 MAS at 72”).
(1.83 m) |
ΒΑΤ

Measure x-ray image length and width. Each must

agree with numerical indicator settings (step 2)
wizhin 1.8% of SID. (.72” at 40” SID, (18.3 mm at
1.016 m) on 1.3” at 72” SID) (33 mm at 1.83 m).
22007-D20
Mark light field (step 4) in relation to x-ray field ILLUSTRATION 4-11-47
on film. Measure misalignment at each of the
four edges. Total misalignment of either the two
length of two width edges must not exceed 1.8%
of SID.
14 x 17 FILM
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for a SID of 72” (1.83 m). (35.5cm x 43.2cm) RAT
PATTERN
If edge to edge light field and x-ray field alignment ON FILM
exceeds 1.8% of SID adjust as follows:

a. Remove the Blade Control Knobs and

collimator front nameplate. Refer to
Section 14-1. LATERAL
DISPLACEM
b. With nameplate removed, temporarily
reinstall knobs and adjust field size to
same setting as in step 2.

c. Slightly loosen the two light housing LIGHT FIELD 22008-010

mounting screws. See Illustration LONGITUDINAL
DISPLACEMENTS
d. With RAT in holding fixture beneath
collimator, shift light housing so that tight ILLUSTRATION 4-11-48
field aligns with the grid pattern of the
x-ray field from Step 5.

4-11-38
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

e. Retighten the two light housing mounting

screws and replace the namepiate and con-
trol knobs.

+. | Repeat the alignment check from Step 1.

10. If the indicated versus actual field size does not

fail within specifications, adjust the appropriate
pointer or pointers as follows:

a. Remove the Blade Control Knobs and the

nameplate. Refer to Section 14-1.

b. Gently bend the pointer sideways to make

the necessary adjustment.

c. Replace the nameplate and the knobs.

d. Repeat the alignment check from Step 1.

LIGHT

11. Record collimator Beam Alignment on F-3382, CREWS

Sec. 7 Test SET-F. o —
=? m 3 22009-P10

411-39
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SECTION 16 DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY; INHERENT FILTRATION

To meet HEW requirements:

The half-value layer of the useful beam at 80 KVP shall be not less than 2.3mm aluminum.

NOTE: Refer to Direction 13894, Part ll, Section 2 “Radiation Instruments” for specific information
on different types of instruments.
DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY
1. Position radiation probe of an integrating
radiation measuring instrument so that the
center of the active probe area is 12 inches
(304.8 mm) from the end of the collimator
and centered in the useful beam. Collimate —

down to area of probe using light beam.

2. Keep other equipment at least 4” (101.6 mm)

away from probe to prevent radiation scatter
errors. Remove the 1.0 and 2.0 mm selective A
filters from collimator. i \ |
i | 12” (304.8 тт)
3. Use technic factors of 80 KVP: 20 to 48 MAS. STANDARD poa
MAS should be adjusted so that reading in ABSORBER AA
| _— USEFUL BEAM
step 4 is approximately 3/4 scale. \
\

sa 4. Make an exposure and measure radiation (total PROBE x FLOOR

R) with no added filters. This represents 100% \

transmission level. Record readings. 20629-D11

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-50
sa 5. Place standard absorber 46-173632G1 in beam.
Absorber must be in collimator accessory rails.
Repeat exposure and record reading.
RATIO = Reading with Standard Absorber
6. Divide reading in step 5 by reading in step 4. Reading without Standard Absorber

a. If Ratio is greater than 0.5, then fixed

filtration must be left as is.

b. If Ratio is less than 0.5, then fixed filtra-

tion must be added (mandatory).

7. The 0.5 minimum ratio is mandatory. If fixed

filtration must be added, refer to Direction
13894, Test 13, Beam Quality.

8. Record Data on F-3382, Test 13.

411-40
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC. 17 MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM

initial Conditions:

@ Main power circuit breaker - ON

© X-ray generator keyed switch - OFF SPEED DRIVE
e = Charger cord disconnected. CONTROL BRAKE ASSIST LATCH
KNOB HANDLE BUTTON BAR
17-1 Motor Drive Controls and Safety Interlocks

1. Check Speed Control Knob. The Drive Motor

Speed Control Knob should rotate freely and
spring return.

2. Place Direction Selector in FORWARD position.

Depress Brake Handle and advance Speed Con-
trol Knob. The slow speed should begin with
some pre-travel of the speed lever.

3. Check Brake Handle. The brake handle limit

switch should be actuated when the Brake
Handle is depressed within 3/8” (9.53 mm) of
its bottom, brake released, position.

4. Check front safety bumper. The bumper should

depress completely without binding and spring
return. The drive power should be de-energized
when the bumper is depressed approximately 1/4
inch. (6.35 mm).

5. Plug the changer cord into a convenience outlet.

Check that the motor drive system is disabled
when the charger cord is plugged into a conven-
ience outlet. 23573-P10
DIRECTION CHARGER SAFETY
6. Turn circuit breaker - OFF. SELECTOR CORD BUMPER

ILLUSTRATION 4-11-51

4-11-41
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS ΑΜΧ-Η X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

17-2. Motor Drive Speed Checks and Adjustments

Instrumentation:
BA1R15
e | Connect DVM (200 VDC scale) to 8A1-5 (+)
and 8A1-6(-)
e Block 16” (0.4 m) wheels just off floor with
wooded blocks
e Place piece of tape on edge of wheel to count
RPM

1. Turn main circuit breaker ON and operate drive

system.

„one
2. Check wheel RPM and drive motor voltage for
conditions listed at the right. Adjust 8A1R 15,

q
if required.

3. If voltage and RPM values do not agree with table,

remove the voltmeter and take the unit off the 22011-P11
wooden block.
ILLUSTRATION 4-11-52
a. Connect a pull scale to a rigid member of
the AMX. Set 6S2, the Forward Reverse
switch, to OFF.

b. With the brake handle depressed, measure

the force required to move the unit in a
straight line on a smooth, level, hard sur-
faced floor such as tile.

c. The force needed to move the unit should UNITS WITH DRIVE ASSIST
not exceed 25 Ibs. (11.34 kg), excluding TEST CONDITIONS: FORWARD ONLY,
starting force, in either the forward or DRIVE ASSIST NOT DEPRESSED
reverse directions. if the moving force is
greater than 25 Ibs, (11.34 kg) the drive Adjustment 8A1R15
train should be examined for a malfunction.
Wheel RPM 54 +/- 2

D.C. Volts < 80 VDC

8А1-5 то 8А1-6

“41-42
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-1582 SM A0654E

SECTION 18 CHARGE BATTERY

Initial Conditions:

a. Ail prior sections completed, or battery voltage too low (Red Band) to continue checkout of unit.

b. Circuit breaker and keyed switch - OFF.

c. Preset charger cutoff adjustment. Turn 4A1R30 maximum counterclockwise.

d. Check that trickle charge circuit is disconnected. Pull and discard jumper from 4A1-7 to 4A1-8.

Instrumentation:

e Battery voltage: Connect digital voltmeter (200 VDC scale) to 3TB1-27 (+) and 3TB1-11 (-).

18-1 Charge Battery and Check Cutoff Setting.

1. Plug charger cord into convenience outlet.

2. Turn circuit breaker to ON and keyed switch to CHARGE. Charge Light should come ON and biower
should run. .

Check that motor drive system is disabled; and that x-ray control will not go into READY condition
when Rotor Button is pressed.

Monitor battery voltage on D V M. While waiting for battery voltage to rise to 131 volts, proceed
with Sections 18-2 and 18-3.

At a battery voltage of 131 volts, slowly adjust 4A1R30 clockwise until the Charger Complete Lamp
lights.

Check 4A1R30 setting. .

a. Turn keyed switch OFF and wait for battery voltage to drop below 130 volts.

b. Turn keyed switch to CHARGE and note voltage when Charge Complete Lamp lights.

c. Charge Complete Lamp should light between 131 and 132 volts. If not, re-adjust 4A1R30 and
recheck.

Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF. Do not disconnect digital voltmeter. Remove charger
cord from convenience outlet.

Disconnect lead from 4A1-4. Temporarily connect jumper across:4A 1-8 to 4A1-2. Turn 4A1-R11
fully counterclockwise. Plug charger cord into convenience outlet. Turn keyed switch to the CHARGE
position and circuit breaker to the ON position. Allow batteries to charge to 135.5 +/- .5V. At this
point, slowly adjust 4A1-R11 clockwise until 4A1-K 16 energizes (indicated by the blower cutout}.
To check adjustment, turn off keyed switch and unplug charger cord. Turn keyed switch to the ON
position. Depress rotor button and allow batteries to drain down to approximately 127V. Turn keyed
switch to the CHARGE position and plug-in charger cord. Allow batteries to again charge to 135.5 +/-
.5V and check operation of 4A1-K 16. If necessary, readjust 4A1-R11. When adjustment complete,
turn off charger, disconnect charger cord, remove jumper from 4A1-8 to 4A1-2 and replace connection
to 4A1-4.
4-11-43
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

18-2 While Waiting for Battery to Charge, Complete Paper Work

1. PMS Data Record, F3316

2. HEW Field Tests, F3382

Battery Service Logs, 3 ea; F3560

Assemblers Report, Federai Form FD 2579

Collect and complete Product Locator Cards

18-3 While Waiting for Battery to Charge, Complete Mechanical Assembly

1. Install the kick panel over the battery retainer plate.

NOTE: It may be necessary to loosen the battery retainer plate and shift it laterally so that the
mounting holes of the kick panel line up.

Place the three completed Battery Service Logs, F3560, in the plastic envelope on the rear surface of
the cassette drawer. Re-install the cassette drawer and replace the rubber liner in the bottom of the
drawer. Refer to Illustration 4-I!-12.

Reinstall the cover over the 8 panel and motor drive board.

Check the cassette drawer and cover panels for proper fit.

Remove all shipping tags and labels. Then clean the exterior surfaces of the unit. Touch up paint as
required. For clean up, use mild soap and water or mild commercial cleaners.

Place the AMX-11 technic chart, Direction 13777, in the holder on the side of the vertical column.

Check tightness of the H. V. Cable terminations at the transformer and tube unit.

4-11-44
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

SECTION 19 BATTERY CAPACITY CHECK

initial Conditions:

ㆍ Main. power circuit breaker - ON

@ X-ray generator keyed switch - ON
e Battery charged and allowed to rest 15 minutes before this test

instrumentation:

@ Battery voltage: digital voltmeter connected across 3TB1-27 (+) and 3TB1-5 (-).

1. Select: 100 KVP, 100 MAS. Close collimator blades and shield with lead.

4.4 Take one exposure every minute for 10 minutes. Do not run rotor more than 6 seconds per exposure.

Record battery voltage after each exposure.

Pe

After the series of 10 exposures, allow batteries to rest for one minute with no power being drawn.
If battery voltage is less than 112 VDC after one minute, battery should be reconditioned as des-
cribed in Chapter 8, Section 5-4.

5. Turn keyed switch and circuit breaker OFF. Disconnect digital voltmeter, and secure close operator’s
panel. Repiace x-ray control cover, installing 6-screws holding it. Replace front and rear covers.

411-45
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SECTION 20 COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION

Demonstrate and explain unit functions to salesman as follows:

a. Demonstrate how to position the vertical column and x-ray tube before the mobile unit is moved
to a new location. Emphasize that the latch must be connected to the tatch bar to prevent the
collimator from striking the x-ray control during transport.

Demonstrate the proper operation of the motor drive feature. Emphasize that the motor will
automatically stop when the brake handle is released, or if the bumper is depressed from striking
an object.

Explain that the unit must be manually pulled back to regain drive control if the bumper comes
in contact with any object. If the bumper is bent so it remains recessed, it must be manually
straightened.

Explain that the unit may be transported manuaily if the user desires to or if the drive feature
fails.

Explain that if the motor drive is used very extensively, the batteries will require more frequent
charging.

Explain that the unit does not require charging when the meter reads in the green regions.
Recharging is required only when the meter reads in the red "LOW" region. It is not rec-
ommended that the unit be left on charge when not in use.

4.4 Make several x-ray exposures using a phantom or fluoricon test pattern at different settings of KVP
and MAS to check that the unit is functioning properly. Particularly check lamp and tone signal
exposure indicators.

Turn over the six Standby/On/Off Switch keys. Advise that the keys should be given only to a
qualified operator. The keys should not be left on the x-ray unit.

Provide copies of the following documents.

a. OM AO0654E, AMX:-11 Operating Manual.

b. Tube Warranty Form; F 2995

Tube Unit Data Sheet with X-Ray Warning Notice; Catalog D1022-27

NCRP Report No. 33, (Obtain signed acknowledgement card, Direction 13440B).

4-11-46
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

5. Service follow-up with timely submission of the following documents.

a. installation Job sheets.

b. Sets of Product Locator Cards.

File: District set, green stripe

Mail: Installation Set, red stripe, in salmon envelope

Complete and file

PMS Data Record, F3316

HEW Data Record, F3382

Complete Assemblers Report, Federal Form FD2579

File: Blue Installers copy

White Federal Copy
Mail: Yellow State Copy
Pink Purchasers Copy

411-47
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E

SEC. 1 PURPOSE AND REQUIREMENTS

1-1 Instructions

1. Perform these checks after completing installation adjustments or preventive maintenance in

Chapter 8. These tests are recommended when trouble shooting the system.

2. Omita function if that check has just been made during an installation or repair procedure,

3. Unless otherwise instructed remove test jumpers and/or test equipment after completing the section
in which they are connected.

4. When a test result is unsatisfactory, refer io service reference column.

1-2 HEW Field Tests

Field tests for HEW compliance are included in Chapter 4 and this chapter. These tests are an elaboration
of the generalized procedures given in Direction 13894 "Field Tests for HEW Compliance.” The table
below lists all pertinent Field Tests for the AMX-Il. Reference is given to the appropriate test in
Direction 13894, and the corresponding chapter and section of this service manual.

Data is to be recorded on Form F3382 “Systems Field Tests for HEW Compliance” and/or on Form F 3316
“PMS Data Record—Mobile Generator |.”

Note that all HEW Field Tests except Test 5, Test Set W, “Application and Function,” and Test 13,
Inherent Filtration Diagnostic Source Assembly,” should be performed during a functional check.
These two tests would also be required if the collimator were replaced as explained by notes in the
“Application” column.

Dir. 13894 | "nc

Test Name Reference | SM A0654E Test Requirement Application Record Data

Application Test 5: Chapter 3 Manual Coltimator used on On instatlution and :eplace- F 3382
and i unction Set W Section 1 2 | Mobile Unit ment of Collimator

X-Ray Test 6 Chapter 4 Audible tone required for On installation and pre- F-3382
Control Sec 2-6 X- dy exposure ventive maintenance calls.
Chapier 5
Seu 2.1

МА$ Ассигасу
Tube Current Test 23 © Chapter 4 | MAS (MEDIAN) + VARIATION On installation, preventive F-3316
Exposure Sec 2-5 1 (+/-40% +.35 mas)+/- .27 mas maintenance calls, and when-
Time Chapter 5 1.5 (+/- 33% + .30 mas}+/- .27 mas ever repairing or replacing
Product Sec 3-4 2 (+/-21% + .32 mas)+/- .28 mas x-ray tube, MA control
2.5 to 4 (+/- 14% + .39 mas) +/- .30 mas circuits, timer circuits, or
5 to 8 (+/-8% + .40 mas)+/- .32 mas H.V. components
10 (+/-7% + .40 mas)+/- .32 mas na `
1210300 -7% to +10%
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

Peak Test 21 Chapter 5 KVP Accuracy On installation, preventive F-3316

Tube Sec 3-5 maintenance calls, and when- F-3382
Potential KvP ever repairing or replacing
(KVP) 50 to 110 (+(10 KVP +7%)) | battery, KVP control circuits,
(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial or H.V. components.
reading after first 20
miiliseconds of exposure.

50 to 96 (+(20 kvp +7%)

(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial
reading during first 20
milliseconds of exposure.

100 to 110 (+25 KVP +7%))

(-(5 KVP +7%)) of dial
reading during first 20
milliseconds of exposure.

Indirect Test Test 27-33 | Chapter 4 19.6 V (RMS) at minimum On installation, preventive F-3382
of Collimator Test Set F Sec 5-5 battery voltage of 110 VOC. maintenance calis, and when-
Hiumination Chapter 5 ever repiacing collimator
Level Sec 4-1 or collimator lamp.

Collimatur Tesi 27-33 | Chapter 4 Misalignment of edges of On installation, preventive F-3382

Ahgnment; Test Set F Sec 5-6 Light Field and X-Ray Field maintenance calis, and when-
Light Fieid Chapter 5 shall not exceed 1.8% of SID. ever repairing or replacing
to X-Ray Sec 4-5 collimator or x-ray tube unit.
Field

Collimator Test 27-33 | Chapter 4 Field size indicators shall On installation, preventive F-3382
Alignment; Test Set F Sec 5-6 agree with actual field maintenance calls, and when-
Actual vs Chapter 5 size within 1.8% of SiD. ever repairing or replacing
indicated Sec 4-4 collimator
X-Ray
Field

Inherent Test 13 Chapter 4 Half value layer of usefui On installation, and whenever F-3316
Filtration; Sec 6-1 x-ray beam shail not be less replacing tube unit, insert, F-3382
Diagnostic than 2.3 mm at 80 KVP collimator mirror, or other
Source absorption between source
Assembly and patient.

1-3 Tools and Materials

1. Voltmeter, 0/150/300 vac, 25 to 500-Hz, accuracy 3/4 of 1% of full scale, Weston Instruments Inc.
Cat. No. 433-1903010. Where this meter is not readily available, use the following instruments with
lower response on the square wave 60 Hz and the higher frequence (500 Hz) voitage. Voltmeter,
0/150/300 vac, 25 to 125 Hz accuracy 3/4 of 1% of full scale, GE type AP-9, Cat. No. 50-20102RHRH
or Weston Instruments Inc. Cat. No. 433-1903009.

2. Multimeter, Simpson Mode! 260, Triplett Mode! 630 or equivalent (20,000-ohm/volt dc, 5,000-ohm
volt/ac).

3. Standard wrench (507A935G1) for GE type Il cable terminals.

4. Qscilloscope, Tektronix 564 or equivalent, dual trace, memroy type with algebraic addition feature
and X10 probes. (A Tektronix type 422 scope is satisfactory where trouble shooting is not required.

5. 1-gallon (3.8 litres) Diala AX for adding the HV transformer, if required.

6. Socket wrench 1-1/16" hex.

5-2
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

Level (Machinist).

Digital Muitimeter, Fluke Model 8000A, or equivalent.

14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm) Cassette and suitable x-ray film.

DC milliameter, 1.5/15/150, accuracy 1/2 of 1% fuil scale, Weston instruments inc. Model 931 or
equivalent.

11. HV Divider (C1515A) with Direction 13788.

12. HEW Field Test Kit including Receptor Alignment tool 46-177371P1 and Standard test absorber
45-173632G1.

13. Radiation Meter (integrating dose type): Capintec Model 192; Berthold LB 1310 (Nuclear Associates
05-640) or equivalent.

14. Fiuoricon Test Pattern.

15. Rasistor, 100 ohms, 1 watt with a banana plug at each end.

16. 0.5-k, 2-w Potentiometer wired as a variable Resistor.

SEC.2 MOBILE UNIT MECHANICAL CHECKS

2-1 Tube Unit and Collimator

--Initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker—OFF

X-ray generator “Standby” switch—OFF
Charger cord disconnected

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

1. Unscrew and depress The collimator should rotate smoothly and Chapter 8, Section 6-1
the rotational detent but- lock positively at 09, +/- 159 +/-45° and
ton on the right side of +/-90° from the front position.
the collimator. Rotate
the collimator about Play between the rotating body of the
the tube unit. collimator and the stationary brass flange
is not permissible.

2. Release the tube. Look for free movement when the lock Chapter 3, Section 2-3
unit rotation lock and is released and no slippage when the fock
rotate the x-ray tube is tightened. .
unit through its range of
travel.

5-3
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

2-2 Extension Arm Assembly

Initial conditions: Same as Section 2-1

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

1. Release the yoke The yoke should turn freely and index at Chapter 8, Section 3-1
rotation lock and rotate 90° and 180° positions either direction
the yoke 180° each side from the vertical position.
of the vertical position.
The yoke rotation lock should hold the yoke
at any position.

2. Release the tele- The telescoping sections should extend and The chain is adjusted by
scoping arm lock and. retract freely with x-ray tube and collimator loosening the four Allen
depress the arm interlock attached. Tube sections should extend and head screws securing the
button. Extend the tele- retract equally. Check that the link chain telescoping arm lock and
scoping arm. located in the extension arm is adjusted to moving the lock forward
remove backlash in the tube sections and or backwards to tighten
permit easy section extension and retraction. or loosen the chain.
respectively. See
The telescoping arm lock should hold the Chapter 8, Section 3-2.
sections together and lock the sections in
any position.

The arm latch should latch and untatch

freely and hold the section firmly together
when retracted.

2-3 Column and Vertical Carriage Assembiy

Initial conditions: Same as Section 2-1.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

4 1. Rotate column through The column should turn smoothly and Chapter 8, Section 2 for
its range of travel. freely for 360°. Torque should be AMX-II with column
adjusted between 4.5 ft-lb (6.1N-m) and rotational lock. For AMX-1|
9.0 ft-lb (12.2N-m). without column rotational
lock (46-1656006 14, G15),
remave covers at base of
The carriage should travel freely. The mov- column and adjust friction
2. Release the-vertical pad spring tension with a
ing effort should not exceed 13 pounds.
arm lock and move the 3/32 hex wrench. Adjust all
(5.9 kg) in either direction except for 2 in-
vertical carriage over its four pads equally; and turn
ches (50.8 mm) on top most travel and 10
full range of travel. each set screw only 1/4 turn
inches (254 mm) on the bottom.
at a time. Rotate column and
The carriage when counterbalanced should
repeat adjustment as meeded.
not drop more than 2 inches (50.8 mm) from Replace covers.
the top stop and not rise more than 10 in-
ches (254 mm) from the bottom stop. The
carriage should be capable of being stopped
and remain balanced in any other position.

5-4
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

The carriage should be capable of being

locked in ali positions. The lock should
hold a 15-pound (6.8 kg) load. Locks
should turn freely, lock positively, and
release fully.

3. Retract the tele- The latch should automatically engage the Chapter 8, Section 3-3
scoping arm, rotate the latch bar. Check for easy release by ro-
column and lower the tating the latch CW and raising the teles--
vertica! carriage to en- scoping arm.
gage the transport latch
to the latch bar.

2-4 Base, Cabinet and Brakes

Initial conditions: . Same as Section 2-1.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

1. Open the cassette Covers and doors should fit properly. The
drawer . Check cover cassette door should be properly aligned and
panels. open and close without mechanical interfer-
ence. The magnetic latches should be en-
gaged and have egual holding forces. The
control cabinet door should fit well without
mechanical interference.

2 With the motor The forward push or pull required to move Binding in Drive Train
drive de-energized, release the unit, with the brakes released, should
the brake, and move the not exceed 25 pounds. (11.34 kg). Chapter 8, Section 4.
unit ont a smooth, hard
level floor. The brakes should be actuated when the
brake handle is in the free position and
released when the handle is depressed.
The brake handle and linkage should move
freely without interference when released.
Each wheel brake should hold a minimum
of 320 inch pounds (36.1 Nm) torque
with the brake linkage and handle prop-
erly adjusted.

55
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I1 X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

2-5 Motor Drive System

Initial conditions: Main power circuit braker—ON

X-ray generator “standby” switch—OF F
Charger cord disconnected.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

1. Check motor drive

system controls and safe-
ty interlocks.

a. Speed Control Knob The drive motor speed control knob should
rotate freely and spring return.

b. rake Release Handle The brake handle limit switch should be

actuated when the brake handle is de-
pressed within 3/8” (9.53 mm) of its
bottom, brake released, position.

c. Front Safety Bumper The front safety bumper should depress

completely without binding and spring
return. The drive power should be de-
energized when the bumper is depressed
approximately 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).

d Latch Bar The Latch Bar should depress and spring

return. With the arm latched, the unit
should be capable of high forward speed.

e. Charger Cord The motor drive should be disabled

when the charger cord is plugged into
a convenience outlet.

2a. Block 16” (0.4 m)

wheels just off floor.
Connect 0-100 vdc meter
to 8A1-5(+) and 8A1-6(-).

2b. Operate drive system, Chapter 4

check RPM and voltage. Section 2-7
Readings at: RPM VOLTAGE ADJUST
MAX: Full Speed Forward 54 +/-2 75 +/-%* 8A1R15

*Not to exceed 80 vdc, average.

5-6
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

3. Drive the mobile unit Observe that the unit stops within 3 Chapter 8, Section 4-1
at full speed forward into inches (76.2 mm) of the impact point.
a chair or other light ob- Also check that the drive belt does
ject to make contact with not jump or make any unusual noise
the bumper. Be sure the as the unit stops.
unit will not be damaged
or anyone injured by this
test.

SEC.3 ELECTRICAL CHECKS

3-1 Battery Circuit Calibration Check
Initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker—OFF
X-Ray generator standby switch—OFF
Charger cord disconnected
Unit cooled for 15 minutes with Operator’s Pane! Cover removed after charging.
See Chapter 4, Sec. 2.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

aa. Connect 0.5K

” 2-watt potentiometer
in series with Gray .
lead from 3TB1-26.
5M1 Reference Points

Connect Digital Voltmeter Less than 110 vdc; ŘED

(0-200 vdc scale) to 4A1-2(+) “Recharge” or “Low”
and 4A1-11(-). Band.

b. Close Operator's Panel 110 vde; Black mark

(don't short test leads). between Red and Green
Mechanically zero 5M1. Bands.

c. Open Operator's Panel Battery Voltage depends on state of charge.

6CB1 and 551 ON. Adjust
0.5K Potentiometer for
110 +/- 0.1-von Digital
Voltmeter.

d. Close Ops. Panel, When digital voltmeter reads 110 +/- 0.1-v Adjustment Procedure 1,
allow to thermally stabilize 5M1 should read on BLACK mark between Chapter 7, Schematic
for 5 minutes and recheck Red and Green Bands. Reference (2,C).
Step c.

ae. Turn 6CB1 and 5S1 OFF.

Disconnect test leads and
reconnect Gray lead from
3181-26.

5-7
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

f. Plug charger cord When digital voltmeter reads 131 to 132 vde
into convenience outlet. the charge complete lamp should light.
Turn 6CB1 ON. Turn Adjustment procedure 2,
keyed x-ray genera- Exhaust blower for battery compartment Chapter 7, Schematic
tor switch to CHARGE. should run whenever charger cord is plugged Reference is 2,c.
into outlet, and Generator Switch to CHARGE.

g. Attempt to drive unit Drive motor should not run and the generator
and press rotor button should not go into "READY" with the charger
with charger cord cord connected.
connected.

h. Turn power OFF and NOTE: Battery capa-

disconnect voltmeter. city check will be made
in Section 5.

3-2 Tube Rotation Check

Initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker—ON

X-ray generator standby switch— ON
Battery charge indicator— Green band
Charger cord disconnected.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

. la. Depress the hand- READY light shouid light about 3 seconds 5DS4, Schematic Ref.
switch ROTOR after ROTOR button is depressed. 77,0.
button. The x-ray tube anode should accelerate to
Do not press X-ray operating speed (3400 rpm) within the 3
button. second interval before the READY light
glows.

b. Release Rotor button if less than 10 seconds, x-ray tube should be SM-D1154A for X-ray
and note coasting time replaced to prevent rotor freeze up during use. tube replacement.
(time rotor noise is
still audible).

2a. Turn circuit breaker

and “standby” switch
OFF.

b. Disconnect and tape

white stator lead at
3TB1-39.

с. Turn circuit breaker

and standby switch ON.

d. Depress handswitch Check that READY does not light at end Rotor interlock sensor
rotor button—do press of 3-second acceleration interval. 3A2V5, Schematic, Ref.
x-ray button. 24,F.

e. Turn power OFF and

restore connections.
5-8
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

3-3 MA and Filament Protection

initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker-OFF

X-ray generator standby switch—OFF
Charger cord disconnected

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

la. Remove the jumper

(with banana plugs) from
terminals MA+ & MA- on
panel 3.
install an accurate 0 to 150
ma, DE millameter with
plus lead in the MA+ end
and the minus lead in the
MA-.

b. Connect a O to 150 v,
iron vane type, AC voltmeter
across 3TB1-18 and 3TB1-12
to read XS-XC Filament
Primary Voltage.

c. Turn the x-ray tube

port up, close collimator
blades and cover collimator
port with a 1/8” (3.175 mm)
thick lead sheet.

d. Turn circuit breaker

and standby switch ON.
Select 80 KVP, 200 MAS,
(2-second exposure).

소소 e. Take an exposure and MA should be between 95 and 105 MA. If MA is not 100, adjust
read the ma meter. Do not 3A2R34 to obtain 100
make more than one expo- MA X-ray tube current.
sure per min. Refer to Chapter 4, Sec.
1-3 or Chapter 4, Part Il,
Sec. Il.
속어. Make another exposure
and read the voltage across
3TB1-18 and 3TB1-12. At
the end of the exposure.

g. Press the Rotor button AC Filament Primary Voltage on Adjust 3A2R30 to obtain
only and read voltage across 3781-18 and 37B1-12 should not the same reading as in
3781-18 and 3TB1-12. change more than 1.0-v. step f. Refer to Chapter
RMS between steps f and g. 4, Sec. 1-3 or 4-11-28.

5-9
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

2a. Turn circuit breaker

and standby switch OFF.
Disconnect filament trans-
former primary lead at
3TB1-18 and tape.

2b. Turn power ON and Check that READY lamp does not Filament interlock sensor
press rotor button only. light at end of 2-1/2 second rotor 3A2Y 13, Schematic
acceleration interval. Ref. 27B.

3-4 MAS (Time) and Overload Check

Initial conditions: Same as Section 3-3.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

la. Connect a scope

with accurately calibrated ©
horizontal sweep as shown
in IHustration 5-1.
4,4
4 lb. Make an exposure Measure x-ray exposure duration from
at 10 MAS at 80 KVP 98 to 102 milliseconds.
measure exposure duration
from scope waveform.
4,4
a Ίο. Make asecond Measure x-ray exposure duration H the trace does not
exposure at 100 MAS, from 0.98 to 1.02 seconds. correspond with
80 KVP. Measure Illustration 5-1, adiust
exposure duration 3A1R4 to obtain
from scope waveform. correct interval timing
for the 100 MAS
selection as shown in
the lower waveform of
illustration 5-1. Refer
to Chapter 4, Part Il
Sec. 12-1,

PROBE: 2TB1-1
GND: 2TB1-3
UPPER H: 20 ms/div (10 mas)
LOWER H: 0.2 sec/div (100 mas)
V: 5.0-v/div x 10 (Probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +/-, Set Point

ILLUSTRATION 5-1

5-10
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

2a. Turn circuit breaker

and standby switch OFF.

2b. Disconnect MAS Select-

or lead at 3TB1-21 and tape:

2c. Set KVP selector at 50.

4,823. Make an exposure and Exposure should terminate within 3 to 3K3 Time delay relay.
a. 。 .
time exposure duration with 3:4 + .2 seconds by safety back-up Schematic reference
sweep second hand of watch. timer. 78,D.

2e. Turn power OFF and

reconnect MAS selector
tead at 3TB1-21.

3-5 H.V. Divider Check of KVP Calibration and MA.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

a. Connect calibrated H.V. Refer to Direction

Divider and dual trace scope 13288A for use and
as shown in III. 5-2. calibration of H.V.
Connect 0-150 DCMA meter Divider with oscilloscope.
in MA+ and MA- Jacks on
Panel 3.
Connect 0-200 DCV Digital
Voltmeter to 3TB1-27(+)
and 3TB1-5(-).

b. Turn circuit breaker Battery voltage will depend on state of

and stand-by switch ON. charge. For this test must be between
Note battery voltage. 110 and 120 volts.

2-4 с. Discharge or charge Addition of H.V. Divider and 5 feet (1.5 m) X-ray tube current;
battery for a voltage H.V. cables will alter MA setting. Adjust Chapter 4, Sec. 2-4.
between 110 and 3A2R34 if necessary for 100 MA +/- 1.
120 volts. If nec-
essary, make ex-
posures at 80 KVP,
200 MAS. Rest one
minute between ex-
posures.

aa. Make an x-ray ex- Compare scope waveform will 11. 5-3.
posure at 80 KVP, 4 MAS, KVP should be 80 (+(10 KVP +5%)) (-(5
Measure KVP. KVP +5%)). Check during last 20 milli-
seconds of exposure as MA stabilizer does
affect KVP during first 20 milliseconds.
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-981 SM A0654E
A Indicates Change

a... Watt one minute from Battery voltage should be between 110 and
step d. Measure and record 120 volts. MA should be 100 MA.
battery voltage, then make a
second exposure at 80 KVP,
200 MAS. Measure MA and
record.
4,4
af. Wait one minute A KVP should be within +(10 KVP + 5%)/
between exposures then -(5 KVP + 5%) of selected value. MA
repeat steps d and e at should be within 95 and 105 MA ata
50 KVP and 110 KVP. battery voltage between 110 and 120 volts.
110
g. Calculate KVP KVP (MIN) = KVP (measured) x Batt. Voit if KVP is outside
(MIN) and KVP (MAX) tolerance refer to
for 50, 80, and 110 KVP 120 primary waveform
based on measured KVP KVP(MAX) = KVP (measured) x Batt. Volt check. Chapter 4,
and battery voltage. Sec. 2-6.
h. Record data on KVP (MIN) and KVP (MAX) must be within There are no usable
F3382. Calculate KVP +/-5 KPV of each selected value. MAS must autotransformer taps
and MA deviation. be within 5% of 100 MA at each selected value. оп {Не АМХ-П.
Refer to III. 5-4 for The H.V. transformer,
sample record. X-ray tube unit. or H.V.
cables may have to be
replaced.

i. Remove H.V. Divider X-ray tube current;

and scepe. Do not disconnect Chapter 4, Sec. 2-4.
tube Current test meter.

4,4
i. Make an exposure at 4 Readjustment of 3A2R34 will be required
80 KVP, 200 MAS. Readjust to compensate for removal of H.V. Divider
3A2R34, if reguired for and (1.5 m) cables.
MA value of step e.

5-12
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E

HV TRANSFORMER DUAL HV DIVIDER C1516A 5 FT. (1.5 m) HV CABLE

MODEL 46-150625G1
10 FT. (3.0 m)
Lone HV CABLE.
Oc X-RAY
carnooe Mn TUBE
10 FT. UNIT =
HV CABLE
I
CLOSE COLLIMATOR ・
BLADES AND
COVER WITH 1/8” (3.175 mm) LEAD SHEET

D
A
A
rå
FOR LONG RUNS USE TWISTED PAIR CABLE
X10 PROBES u
0

(Belden No. 8422 two cond. twisted, shielded, 18mmfd ft.)

WITH GROUNDED <, | EU) | To KEEP CAPACITANCE EFFECTS AT A MINIMUM
SHIELDS O CHI

O cup

GROUND Е
SCOPE THROUGH TEKTRONIX 422 OR 564 OSCILLOSCOPE
POWER CORD (dual trace with aigebraic addition)
OBSERVE SCOPE FROM LEAD SHIELDED AREA nao

ILLUSTRATION 5-2

110 (+(10 KVP + 5%))

4 MAS EXPOSURE
«a (.(5 KVP + 5%))
ュー 80 (+(10 KVP + 5%))
(-(5 KVP + 5%))

«_ 50 (+(10 KVP + 5%))

(45 KVP 516)

18739.012

ILLUSTRATION 5-3

5-13
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

TEST 19 (CONTINUED) Use this part for second Rad or SF tube unit.

TUBE UNIT. #6 -/65 75009

Serial No. ンジ ZS -

LY YES O NO Requirements of Sec. 19-2 (Ma Accuracy) have been met.

[+ YES Γ] Νο Requirements of Sec. 19-2 (KVP Accuracy) have been met.

Li YES e NO Requirements of Sec. 19-2 (Linearity) have been met.

| (J NOT APPLICABLE

The following data table substantiates the above:

AMAZON AL 一
AV (mw) AYP (MAY.)
| BAIT ив | т” КИР
dla VP ours ERS ERRO; MEAS. enc] A. ASA.

so 116 101191 $1.9 σφο| -/ 92.6 テク と

So 114 ὃς 1-2. o 42.4 |-2..6 7%1

// の 3.5 Jor|*rFz /os.o /07,0|-3,À 1 Υ 4

CNIL
— — W |
V A,
V А.А

F3382 ILLUSTRATION 5-4 Sheet 6 of 11

5-14
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

SEC. 4 COLLIMATOR CHECKS

41 Field Light Check

Initial conditions: © Main power circuit breaker-ON

X-ray generator standby switch—ON
Battery charge indicator green band
Charger cord disconnected.

OPERATOR RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

1a. Position tube unit

and collimator to project
light field on smooth,
surface such as a tile
floor at 40” SID. (1.016 m)

b. Darken room and Field tight should energize and remain on Chapter 8, Section 8
press lite button on for 15 to 20 seconds unless modified per
collimator. Open Chapter 4, Sec. 4-2.
collimazor blades. Light pattern should be of uniform brightness
(no shadows or blotches) with sharply defined
edges approx. square with floor.

2a. Remove the blade To provide required illumination, lamp voltage

control knobs and the must be no less than value listed.
nameplate from the
front oi the colli-
mator.

b. Measure No-Load No Load Min. Lamp Voitage (VAC) | Step down transformer
battery voltage at Battery Voltage RMS Ref. Fluke 8000A |8T1. Tap selection
3TB1-27(+) to 3TB1-5(-). Chapter 4, Section 4-5.
128 22.2 24.3
126 22.0 24.1
124 21.7 23.8
122 21.4 23.5
120 21.1 23.1
118 20.7 22.7
116 20.3 22.3
114 19.9 21.9
112 19.5 21.5
110 19.0 21.0

c. With the field light

energized measure the
voltage across the lamp
socket terminals. *

d. Replace nameplate
and blade control knobs.

5-15
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

4-2 Crosshair Position Check

initial conditions: Same as Section 4-1.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

la. Position tube unit
and collimator to project
light field on a smooth
light surface such as a.
wall at 40” SID.(1.016 m)

b. Darken theroom and The illuminated area on the wall should Chapter 4, Section 4-1.
energize the field light. show equal rectangles of light on either
Slowiy move each blade set side of the crosshair shadows as each set
toward the closed position of blades is moved toward the closed
while observing the light position.
pattern.

4-3 Extension Cylinder Alignment Check (Optional Accessory)

Initial conditions: Same as Section 4-1.

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

ta. Position the tube unit

and coilimator to project
the light field on a smooth
reflective surface such as
a wall at 40” SID. (1.016m)

b. Slide the extension

cylinder into the tracks
at the bottom of the
collimator.

ο. Darken the room and The illuminated area on the cassette Chapter 4, Section 4-3.
energize the field light. should show equal sectors of light on
either side of the crosshair shadows.

4-4 Alignment Checks

Initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker—ON

X-ray generator standby switch-ON
Battery charge indicator—Green band
Charger cord retracted

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

la. Position a loaded
14” x 17” (35.5 cm x 43.2 cm)
cassette under the collimator.
Using the collimator measuring
tape, set SID at 48” (1.2 m).
5-16
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-if X-RAY UNIT |
10-377 SM A0654E

b. Adjust blade knobs

to yield an indicated x-ray
field size of 12" x 12"
(304.8 mm x 304.8 mm) at
48” SID (1.2 m).
с. Energize the field
light and center tight field
on cassette.

d. Assemble and attach

RAT to collimator using
RAT holding fixture. Use
collimator lamp, note and
record where edges of
light field intersect RAT.

a... Make an exposure

a: 50 KVP, 6 MAS. De-
velop film.
。 . X-Ray field size as measured on film must :
2... Messure x-ray field be within 1.8% of SID, that is 11.04 to 12.86 | Chapter 4, Section 5-6.
' (302.6 mm to 306.9 mm) inches for a 12”
(304.8 mm) field size at 48” SID (1.2 m).
3. Mark light field Total misalignment of either length Chapter 4, Section 5-6.
(step 1c) on x-ray film or width edges must not exceed 0.86
and measure total mis- (21.6 mm) inches (1.8% of 48 inches).
alignmant light to (1.22 m).
x-ray field.

SEC.5 SYSTEM CHECKS

5-1 Film and Indicator Checks

initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker—ON

X-ray generator standby switch—ON
Battery condition indicator— Green band
Charger cord disconnected

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

4,8
& la. Make several expos-
ures using a phantom at
different settings of KVP
and MAS to insure the
unit operational.

b. Develop and check Check lamp and tone signal exposure indi-
thé resulting films. cators. Do not exceed tube or generator
ratings.
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

5-2 Battery Electrolyte Level Check (Do not repeat on installations.)

Initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker— OFF

X-ray generator standby switch--OFF
Charger cord disconnected

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

la. Charge battery until

charge complete lamp
lights. Allow battery
to rest minimum of 2
hours,

b. Review battery Chapter 3, Section 1-3.

safety precautions.

c. Remove cassette
drawer, kick panel and
battery retaining plate.
Fold back Mylar cover.

d. Use insulated tools,

disconnect battery and
remove the three cell
groups.

e. Use furnished wrench Electrolyte level in each cell should Chapter 3, Section 6-3.
remove vent caps and check not be below baffle.
electrolyte level in each
celi using syringe. Add water if level is less than 1/4” Add distilled or deion-
(6.35 mm) above baffle. ized water to raise elec-
lyte level to 3/8” (9.53 mm)
Record cc of water added to each cell. above baffie.
Note: Water reserve of cell is 16cc.
if more than 16cc water
required per cell, elec-
trolyte check interval is
too long or battery
charger is not cutting off
at 131-132v. Chapter 8,
Section 5.

f. Replace vent caps,

reinstall battery and
cover panels.

g. Clean off white

powder deposits with
non-metallic brush.

5-18
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

5-3 Battery Capacity Check

Initial conditions: Main power circuit breaker—ON

X-ray generator standby switch-CHARGE
Charger cord connected

OPERATION RESULTS EXPECTED SERVICE REFERENCE

la. Charge battery until

charge complete lamp
lights.

b. Allow battery to rest

30 minutes before test.

c. Connect digital volt-

meter, 3TB1-27(+) and
3TB1-5(-). Record
battery voltage.

d. Select 100 KVP,

100 MAS. Close colli-
mator blades and shield
with lead.

속초. Take one exposure Battery voltage should be at least 112 vdc If battery voltage is less
every minute for 10 min. after 10 exposures with a 1 minute rest. than 112 vdcthe bat-
Do not run rotor more than tery should be recon-
6 seconds per exposure. ditioned as described
Record battery voltage in Chapter 8, Section 5.
after each exposure.

2a. Select 80 KVP

200 MAS. Record
Battery Voltage.

b. Take an exposure Battery voltage drop during the exposure If voltage drop is ex-
and note battery voltage should be approximately 22 to 24 volts, cessive, Battery may
during the exposure. reguire reconditioning
or may have high
resistance terminal
connection.

5-19
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

CHAPTER 6
THEORY AND SERVICE

SECTION

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .............,.........,..

BATTERY CHARGER ..................,...........,.,，

2-1 Turning On Battery Charger ......................
2-2 Turning Off Battery Charger ......................

INVERTER DRIVERS ...........................,....

INVERTER DRIVER OUTPUT COUPLERS ................

4.1 60 Hz Inverter Driver Output Couplers ..............
42 500 Hz Inverter Driver Output Couplers ..............

INVERTERS ............................ ve

X-RAY TUBE FILAMENT SUPPLY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS

X-RAY EXPOSURE CONTROL ..........................

7-1 Off To Ready ........................,.........
7-2 Ready To Exposure Start ........................

EXPOSURE TERMINATION ..........................,.

8-1 Radiographic Timer Termination By Forced Commutation
8-2 Termination Due To Tube MA Overload ............
8-3 Termination Due to Release of the Handswitch X-Ray or
RotorButton ................ 0 eee 기 기 기이기기 에의

COLLIMATOR LAMP CIRCUIT ...................,....

10 MOTOR CONTROL .............

L00000 0r0regese zone:

11
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC. 1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

NOTE: Waveform (Ex: W31-A) will be found in Sec. 11 of this chapter.

The АМХ-П is a battery powered X-ray unit rated to provide up to 110 kvp at 100 ma (fixed ma) for
radiography. The unit cannot be operated with the charge cord piugged into a wali outiet. Power is ob-
tained from the batteries for the collimator lamp, motor drive and X-ray exposures. If fully charged the
batteries will provide up to 10,000 mas at 100 kvp for X-ray exposures provided the rotor on-time is
limited to 10 seconds per exposure.

Refer to the simplified block diagram of the AMX-II in Illustration 6-1. The battery charger is energized
when the charge cord is inserted into a suitable wall outlet. Incoming AC power is rectified and fed to
the battery. The battery charger includes a circuit to sense the battery charge level and automatically
turn off the charger when the battery voltage reaches a predetermined level.

Battery power is connected to the 60 Hz and 500 Hz inverter drivers and the 60 Hz and 500 Hz inverter
circuits. Both inverters change the DC battery power into 60 Hz and 500 Hz. square wave power to per-
mit circuit isolation and transformation to higher and lower voltages.

The output of the 60 Hz inverter is fed to an isolation transformer. One secondary of this transformer
supplies power to the X-ray tube stator. Another secondary winding provides power to a transformer which
steps voltage down to supply the X-ray tube filament.

The 509 Hz inverter output feeds on autotransformer which is controlled by the knob on the kvp selector.
The autotransformer feeds the primary of the HV Transformer where it is stepped up and applied to the
X-ray tube during an exposure.

SEC.2 BATTERY CHARGER

Schematic reference sheet 1, Chapter 7.

The battery charger (a) provides pulsating DC voitage at about 140 V to the battery, (b) turns off the
charging voltage when the battery reaches 130 V, (c) energizes signal lamps to indicate “charge on” and
“charge complete”, and (d) actuates meter to indicate battery charge.

Refer to Illustration 6-2. When the line cord is inserted into a power outlet, AC voltage is supplied to
the bridge rectifier. If battery voltage is below 128 V as measured by the battery level sensor, the charger
will supply current to the battery. The battery level sensor also activates the ‘‘Charge On” indicator to
show that the battery is being charged. When battery voltage reaches 130, the battery level sensor will
turn off the charger and “Charge On” indicator, and activates the “Charge Complete” lamp.

2-1 Turning On Battery Charger

Schematic reference, sheet 1, Chapter 7.

When battery voltage drops below 128 V the bias voltage to the level sensor 4A107 (8,C) will cause it
to turn off (see W-41B). The bias voltage resulting across 4A1R9 will cause 4A1010 to turn off and de-
energize 4A1K23 (7,D). This opens contact 4A1K23-B (5,E) and places the gate of control SCR 4CR3 (5,A)
at a positive potential with respect to the cathode (see W-42) turning it on. Contro! SCR 4SCR 4CR3 will
charge the battery until it is turned off as described in Sec. 2-2.

6-1
AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
_ SM AO654E

1-9 NOLLVHISNTTI
LINA AVEX IWXWY JO WYHEDVIG M2018 q ヨ ITdWIS
οιονθιθι
HAWHOJSNVHL « HIWHOJSNYHL < HILHIANI
AH -01nv ZH 00S
HILINN
DGA OEL-OLL ανν

6-2
AHILIVE ΜΟΙ ΝΟΙΟΝΙ
‘H39UYVHI
AHILIVE
TN ヨ MV 11 ゴ SSN
SYSTEMS

АУН-Х
HILHIANI
MEDICAL

ZH 09
HOLVIS 38NL
ELECTRIC

AYH—X
GENERAL
7-1576
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 | SM A0654E

BATTERY
CONDITION
INDICATOR

—
BATTERY
CHARGER
3 ) pl BRIDGE CONTROL SCR
RECTIFIER 4CR3 5,A BATTERY
” me “| |

—
CHARGE le BATTERY
# ON LEVEL
INDICATOR SENSOR

1
CHARGE
COMPLETE
INDICATOR

18793-010

BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BATTERY CHARGER

ILLUSTRATION 6-2

6-3
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-ll X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

2-2 Turning Off Battery Charger

When battery voltage is 130 the base emitter voltage for 441Q7 (8,C) will turn it on. The voltage across
4A1R9 will turn on 4A1010 and pick up relay 4A1K23 (7,D). Contact 4A1K23-B (5,E) will close, re-
ducing current to the gate of control SCR 4CR3 (5,B) and stopping the charging operation. Contact
4A1K23-A (8,F) opens to increase the emitter base voltage of 44107. Consequently the battery will
not charge again until it has discharged about 3 volts below the charge complete point.

SUMMARY OF CIRCUIT CONDITIONS

CHARGING CHARGE TERMINATION

1. 4A1Q7 is off 1. 4A1Q7 turns оп.

2 4A1010 is off. 2. 4A1Q10 turns on.

3. 4A1K23 is de-energized. 3. 4A1K23 is energized.

4. 4CR3 is ON、 4. 4CR3 is OFF.

5. “Charge On” light is on. 5. “Charge On” light is off.

6. “Charge Complete” lamp is off 6. “Charge Complete” lamp is on.

6-4
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 | | SM A0654E

SEC. 3 INVERTER DRIVERS

From lil. 6-2B it can be seen that the DC battery voltage is fed to the 60 Hz inverter (Sec. 5) where it is
“inverted” into square wave AC power. The inverter driver controls the frequency at which the inverter
operates. The inverter driver output coupler (Sec. 4) provides a peak pulse at the gate of the SCR for
reliable triggering.

120 V
BATTERY

500 HZ INVERTER INVERTER DRIVER INVERTER

DRIVER = OUTPUT COUPLER —___=»—»
(SEE SEC. 3) (SEE SEC. 4) (SEE SEC. 5)

ILLUSTRATION 6-2B

The inverter driver consists of a flip-flop multivibrator triggered by a UJT oscillator. The 60 Hz inverter
driver is the same as the 500 Hz inverter driver except the resistor and capacitor in the oscillator has been
changed to provide the different frequency. _

The schematic reference for the 500 Hz inverter is sheet 5, Chapter 7. A simplified circuit is shown in
Illustration 6-3. The UJT oscillator provides a source of short precisely timed negative pulses with a period
determined by C21 and R18 plus R22. R18 is adjusted to obtain 500 Hz. The pulses are coupled to the
common emitter resistor (R15) of a transistor flip-flop circuit (Q19 and 020). Details of flip-flop circuit
operation may be found in the GE Transistor Manual, Sixth Edition under Square Wave Inverter Drive
Circuits. The output of the flip-flop circuit is amplified by Q49 and Q45 and coupled to the inverter by
transformer 3T1.

In inverter circuits it is important that one SCR be allowed sufficient time to turn off before the other is
placed in conduction. Therefore, the inverter driver circuits are designed to have a slight delay between
the termination of one pulse and the start of the next as specified below.

The 500 Hz inverter SCR gate voltages are shown in W-24. The delay can be seen by observing that one
pulse in W-24A terminates on the left side of the centerline graticule and the next pulse in W-24B starts
to the right of the centerline graticule. An expanded view would appear as shown in Illustration 6-4.
AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
SM A 0654E

£9 NOILVHISNT1I
HIAIHO HILHIANI ZH-005
'SNYUL INdINO | УЗЛА | HOLVYBIALLINW | (ZH 001) HO1VTWISO 100
| 1 |
| |
| | €20
evo |
IT | 129
,十 如 eu | | dk a
Sb pi
| p ADN|3N03U4

6-6
ュー ンジ |
pus | EL biy _
ЦЕ
34 | | =
SYSTEMS

OGH9 | |

|
LON
L | ||

+
6000 | / |
Ιου |
MEDICAL

|
SL 1
UI |
Seu |
0839 ^ | |
ELECTRIC

| |
} | ir
σης
GENERAL
6-978
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

ーー4 - 5V.

—
—
——
—
—|--
| |
一mm He 40 - 80 u SEC.

—
DELAY |!

—
|
|
|
|
I

トーー 22.02 ms — sl

ILLUSTRATION 6-4

6-7
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-11 X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

SEC. 4 INVERTER DRIVER OUTPUT COUPLERS

41 60 Hz Inverter Driver Output Couplers.

Schematic reference sheet 2, Chapter 7.

The output of the 60 Hz inverter driver is coupled to the inverter as shown in Illustration 6-5. This volt-
age charges capacitor C through diode CR. The voltage developed across C is transferred to the SCR gate
through the Silicon Unilateral Switch (SUS). The SUS is a miniature SCR having an anode gate (instead
of the usual cathode gate) and a built-in avalance diode, between the gate and cathode. As voltage across
the SUS rises to the switching voltage point (7-9 volts for a 2N4990) the avalanche diode conducts and
triggers the SUS into conduction. The capacitor C discharges through the SUS and R2. The voltage ac-
ross R2 provides a peak pulse at the gate of the SCR for reliable triggering. Note the normal and abnormal
waveforms. The leading spikes may not be visible unless the scope is properly adjusted.

SCR
(a
= YO トー

dr
F_ !
Lu |
NORMAL - SEEmm W5

6
y | |
Ft
NOT NORMAL- SUS IS
372 NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY
SEC. Ri
CR

ILLUSTRATION 6-5

6-8
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I1 X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

42 500 Hz Inverter Driver Output Couplers

Schematic reference sheet 5, Chapter 7.

Refer to Illustration 6-6.

2CR3

©
TIME DELAY FOR Q7
广 一
一二 一 一 一 q R8
| | —
I | LI |
l
RIS bs | | |

Per
3TI
SEC. = a4 || FF sco) ce
(RY! Tu
-=
RS
CR2 R3
DI DI
Lİ

ILLUSTRATION 6-6

The inverter driver output transformer 3T1 secondary voltages are practically the same as one half the
primary voltages shown in W-23A or B. Capacitor C-6 charges to peak voltage through CR2 and R3. This
voltage appears as an SCR gate trigger spike when 07 turns on as shown in W-24,

A peak voltage as high as 100V is needed for gate triggering of 2CR3. Since 04 can handle only about
200 mA which produces only about 2V, 07 is used to obtain the greater power handling capability.

The base to emitter bias for Q7 is developed across R5 and R13 which also is the charge path for C12.
As described in Sec. 41, the SUS turns on when the voltage across it reacnes 7 to 9 volts. When Q7 con-
ducts the voltage developed across R8 triggers the gate of 2CR3.

6-9
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-I X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

SEC.5 INVERTERS

Schematic reference, 60 Hz, sheet 2, 500 Hz, sheet 5, Chapter 7.

For additional description of inverter circuits see the General Electric SCR Manual, Fifth Edition, Chapter
13.2.

The 60 Hz and 500 Hz inverters are alike except for the method of turning each off and on and the power
handled. The 60 Hz inverter is turned on and off by relay contacts actuated when the handswitch ROTOR
button is pressed. The 500 Hz inverter is turned on by proper gate signal to a control SCR when the hand
switch X-RAY button is pressed, and turned off by forced commutation with another SCR when the in-
tervai timer signals the end of an exposure.

The principie of operation for both inverters is as follows. Refer to the simplified circuit in Illustration
6-7. The inverter driver is providing a square wave AC signal alternately to 2CR3 and 2CR6. Therefore,
one or the other SCR gate will be positive when the inverter is turned on. Assume that 2CR3 turns on
first. Then 2CR6 will remain in a blocking condition. The current from the 120 -v supply will flow through
the upper side of transformer T1. Transformer action will produce a voltage of approximately 2 x 120 =
240 v at the anode of 2CR6 and across capacitor C. When a positive trigger pulse is applied to the gate of
SCR2, it will turn on and apply reverse bias to 2CR3 because of the action of commutating capacitor C.
Capacitor C will maintain a reverse bias across 2CR3 long enough for 2CR3 to turn off. The next positive
trigger pulse at the gate of 2CR3 will cause the circuit to revert to the original state. In- this manner the
current from the DC supply will flow alternately through the two sides of the transformer primary and
produce an AC voltage in the secondary.

Rectifiers 2CR4 and 2CR5 feedback to the battery reactive power stored in the load at the end of a half
cycle of AC voltage.

6-10
AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
SM AO654E

L9 NOILVHISNITI
IWXWV 3H1 30 HIWHYOJSNVHL AH ZH-009 3HL H3MOd OL G3SN Sv
1109419 H ヨ 1LH ヨ ANI 9 SSV19
SLINGNOD 9896 N HA
ヨ IN3ddn9 NOH19313 る ーーーー
SLONGNOD CHOC N3SHM LN3YYND NO81931ヨ 一一 一
< 了 一 一 一一
ax
AHVWI8d
YIWYOJSNVYL
AH OL
ーー前 21

9496 |, UJATUG
YILUJANI
OL

NOILONNJ ανν
NOl1d1Y9S30 303
god, UOT OAS
Ol 43434
/

6-11
9 セーーー ーー
A
一 一 一请 HOLIMS
+
SY YY ποδινοοἱ Сто:
SYSTEMS

Tit
00707 OC —» τα 330-NO y
toz
MEDICAL

ea,
AHVWIUd
YINYOJSNYAL

>
AH OL

ニコ ーーー
YIL

itil
€492 OL 93
ELECTRIC

AHILIVO
| AOZI
m
GENERAL

一 一 一 一中
7-1576
———
AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
SM A 0654E

89 NOILVHISNTT
OLQ"E09EZ
AL AZI OHVA
390148V943
UJMOd LN3WVII4 JOHLNOJ 3SVHd ONISNIS VW O1
38N1 AVH-X |
| (28) (19)
>
194 3 (Z/1) VW OL
YVNOILHOS | 1
"Od Ž 894 Ž 9g4
JOVLIOA 1 1
| | (LA)
| 39VL10A

6-12
Ay ヨON
ヨ ヨゴ ヨ ヨ
690 |
n89 EB è Isnrav
090 (2) 6ου С VW
SYSTEMS

< 294 seu

эх
3801. と 1/
MEDICAL

AVH X 'ISNVHI
OL INIMWVIHI | 4Ν3ΗΗΩΟ
38n1
. ELE AT + tz
SX AAA
ELECTRIC

| HILHIANI |
ZH 09 3901849 OHVA
OL ySH9 OL
GENERAL
6-978
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

SEC.6 X-RAY TUBE FILAMENT SUPPLY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS

Schematic reference sheet 6, Chapter 7.

1. Filament circuit adjustment requires (a) filament voltage near as possible to the proper amount re-
quired to give 100 ma without regulator action and (b) compensation adjustments that will permit
the regulator to hold ma constant as the battery voltage changes over its operating range (it dips as
low as 90 v during an exposure).

Tube ma is controlled by voltage at the filament transformer 7T2 (Illustration 6-8). This voitage
is applied by the proper firing of CR16 and CR20.

As the tube current flows through the reference branch (B1) and the signal branch (B2) voltage is
developed across R56 (V1) and R58 (V2) respectivily. When tube current is 100 ma V1 and V2 are
equal. See Illustration 6-9. If tube current varies from 100 ma V2 will vary proportionately but V1
will remain about the same. This results from the regulator action of CR59 which maintains a rela
tively constant potential across B1, forcing any current change to pass through R58.

| TUBE
CURRENT

R58

82
18791010
ILLUSTRATION 6-9

When a change in tube current causes V2 to vary, Q60 collector voltage wili change. That portion of
collector voltage picked off by R30 is applied to C22, which then takes more or less time to charge
to the turn-on voltage of Q26. When 026 turns on, C22 discharges as shown in Illustration 6-8. The
discharge pulse is transmitted by T18 to the gates of CR16 and CR20, thereby providing phase con-
trol of CR16 and CR20. Q26 is reset and C22 discharged at the end of each 500 Hz half-cycle, as
the unfiltered power supply drops to zero.

To test circuit operation, assume tube current drops below 100 ma. The decreased current will cause
V2 to drop. 060 will conduct less current causing collector voltage to rise. The increased collector
voltage will charge capacitor C22 at a faster rate resulting in quicker turn-on of Q26. The earlier dis-
charge pulses will fire CR 16 and CR17 earlier during each power pulse increasing filament voltage
and tube current. The opposite will occur if tube current rises above 100 ma.

The ma regulator will correct a 5 to 20% error in ma within 20 to 40 ms after an exposure starts.
Examples of ma regulation are shown in W-31A.

During the 2-1/2 sec. warm up period the X-ray tube filament is heated to a preset temperature in
the manner shown in Illustration 6-10.

6-13
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

Filament Control Phase Control Filament

Adjustment___________,,Control_________ñ_SCR's » Transformer
3A2R 30 3A2026 (26,D) 7T2
(63, F) (64, E) (28, C)

ILLUSTRATION 6-10

The filament control voltage during warm-up is adjusted as close as possible to that required to give
a tube current of 100 ma during exposure.

3. The X-ray tube filament transformer receives power form the 60 Hz inverter as shown in Illustration
6-11.

100 ms
Delay. ——————= 3K1-A,B,C
(75, E) (76-C)

Rotor Control Filament

H.S.———==> 3A4K36 B_ «—————————=»
60 Hz Inverter 60 Hz——e SCR's— —e Transformer
(32, F) (74,B) Driver —— Inverter (26,D) 7T2 (28, C)

ILLUSTRATION 6-11

6-14
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS | AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

ROTOR
H.S.
(32 F)

100 MS
DELAY
Ý
< 3A4K36-B
(74, B)

Y
3K1-A,B,C
13,8

3AK22-B >
(14,0) (36, B)

'
500 HZ INVERTER
DRIVER
\
60 HZ INVERTER
DRIVER

1 Y
— 60 HZ 1K1-A, B 500 HZ
INVERTER (37, C) INVERTER

FILAMENT AND mi 2.5 SEC. 3A4K2-B |] READY

ROTOR INTERLOCKS DELAY (81, B) LIGHT

y
3A4K5-A
39, F

X-RAY TUBE X-RAY TUBE SHUT OFF CAP.

STATOR FILAMENTS 1C1 AND 1C2
(25, E) (28, C) (38, E)

ILLUSTRATION 6-12

6-15
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

X-RAY
BUTTON
(83, F)

SHUT OFF
| CAPACITOR
3A1K7-A 102
(86, F) (38, E)
(X-RAYS ARE
WANTED)

\
500 HZ SYNCH SHUT OFF
SYNCH » PULSE | CAPACITOR CHARGE
PULSE GATE GATE
GENERATOR (91, F) (91, Ε)
(500 HZ (SHUT OFF
DRIVER CAPACITOR IS
HAS \ CHARGED)
STARTED)
EXPOSURE START
PULSE TRIGGER
(83-85 F)

γ
INVERTER
ON-OFF
SWITCHES
(38 - 42, B-F)

\
500 HZ
INVERTER
y

HV
TRANSFORMER

X-RAY
TUBE

ILLUSTRATION 6-13

6-16
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-HX-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC. 7 X-RAY EXPOSURE CONTROL

7-1 Off to Ready

The seguence of events leading up. to the READY state are described below.

The X-ray unit is energized by turning on the circuit breaker 6CB1 and the x-ray control switch. The
“power on” lamp will glow. The battery change cord should not be plugged in. The “power on” lamp
and either the “charge on” lamp or the “charge complete” lamp will glow.

Depressing the hand switch ROTOR button energizes relay 3A4K36-B, Illustration 6-12. The 60 Hz In-
verter Power Delay (76, G) will ensure that the inverter driver is functioning 100 ms before battery power
is applied to the 60 Hz Inverter.

The 2.5 sec. delay (79, G) allows the filament to reach operating temperature and the rotor to reach op-
erating speed.

7-2 Ready to Exposure Start

The sequence of events that occur to produce an exposure are shown in Illustration 6-13. These events
presume the unit is in the READY state as described in Sec. 7-1. When 3A1CR28 (85,E) fires capacitor
3A1C3 (84,D) discharges through 3A1CR13, 3A1CR28, 3A1CR63 and 3A6T3. The resulting exposure
start pulse is transmitted to the gate of 2CR2 (39,D) in the inverter ON-OFF circuit. 2CR2 conducts to
complete the 500 Hz inverter circuit and start the exposure.

Note on Illustration 6-13 that three inputs are required to the Synch Pulse Gate before 3A1CR28 fires-
Contact 3A1K7-A, (86, F) activated by X-ray handswitch, removes a ground path from the collector of
3A 1056 (90,F) which is biased on. When the shut off capacitors 1C1 and 1C2 are not charged, 3A1060
will conduct, by-passing the Synch pulse signal and preventing an exposure. A signal from the 500 Hz
Synch pulse generator (49, D) is applied to the base of 3A1056. This signal provides turn-on of 3A1CR28
to step with the 500 Hz inverter pulses.

6-17
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS АМХ-П Х-ААУ ИМТ
6-978 SM A 0654E

SEC. 8 EXPOSURE TERMINATION

There are several means for terminating an exposure. These are individually described below.

81 Radiographic Timer Termination by Forced Commutation

Schematic reference sheet 4 4 9, Chapter 7.

After the rotor button is depressed 1C2 (38,E) is charged to a -80 volts as shown in Illustration 6-14. 1C1
does not charge due to 1CR2.
1CR2 1CR1

| 3R5

1C1
162 POWER TO
CHARGE 1С1
373 TO 50 HZ
SEC. 4 INVERTER

18796-D10
ILLUSTRATION 6-14

During an exposure 2CR2 (38,D) is conducting and 2CR1 is off. When the exposure is to be terminated,
a signal is applied to the gate of 2CR1 (39,D) turning it on, illustration 6-15. Capacitor 1C2 will discharge
through 1C1, 2CR2 and 2CR1. This forces more current through 2CR2 in the reverse direction than was
flowing in the forward, shutting it off. The reverse current charges 1C1 until 2CR2 shuts off.

The Timer consists of an RC timing circuit and UJT 2A1017 (86-87,D) which is turned on at a time period
of mas/100.

At-the end of the selected time period the UJT conducts producing a signal through pulse transforme
3A1T18 (89,E) and 3A1CR44 to turn on 3A1CR47 (88,D). The turning on of 3A1CR47 providesa |
discharge path for 3A1C38 (87,E) through 3A1CR39 (87,C), 3A1CR47, 3A1CR68 and 3A6T5. The
pulse generated by the discharge of 3A1C38 is coupled by 3A6T5 to the gate of 2CR1 (39,D). When
2CR1 conducts, it applies the full negative voltage (-80 v) of 1C2 to the anode of 2CR2 turning it off as
described earlier.

6-18
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS . AMX-IL X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654£

» ΤΟ Η.ν.
TRANSFORMER

EXPOSURE
STOP SIGNAL

1CR2 1681
18787-D10
ILLUSTRATION 6-15

8-2 Termination Due to Tube MA Overload

Schematic reference, sheet 6, Chapter 7.

If tube current reaches 200 +/- 40 MA, the trip coil of 6CB shown at 60,D will trip the main power
circuit breaker, 6CB1, and disconnect the battery from all circuits.

8-3 Termination Due to Release of the Handswitch X-Ray or Rotor Button

Schematic reference, sheet 9, Chapter 7.

Release of the X-ray button closes the 3A1K7-A contact (86,F) and provides a discharge path for 3A1C38.
The pulse generated by the discharge of 3A1C38 stops the exposure by forced commutation as described
in Section 8-1.

Release of the rotor button causes 3A4K36-B contacts to open and remove power from the inverter
driver, and timing circuits. This terminates the exposure.

6-19
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC. 9 COLLIMATOR LAMP CIRCUIT

Schematic reference Page 9, Chapter 7.

1. The collimator lamp circuit is initiated by pushing the collimator field light switch 451.

2 The collimator light receives its power in the sequence shown in Illustration 6-16.

100 MS
451 DELAY > ЗК! … 60 HZ
3A4K36 | (75,E) _06 B) © INVERTER—» 8T1
(74-E) (74,E) (30,C)

3A4K8 GO HZ 4DS1
(75,0) —INVERTER COLLIMATOR
DRIVER LIGHT (31,C)

ILLUSTRATION 6-16

3. Relay 8K1 (32,F) has four contacts functioning in the circuit.

a 8K1-4,5 (29-C) completes the circuit for the collimator transformer primary (8T1).

b. 8K1-4,6 (25,D) allows exposure by closing the circuit for relay 1K1. Relay 1K1 applies battery
power to the 500 Hz inverter.

d. 8K1-7,9 (25,D) allows rotation of the tube rotor when collimator light switch is on by closing
the stator circuit and opening the field lite circuit.

e. 8K1-5,6 (74,E) energizes 3A4K36 in the sequence shown in Illustration 6-16.

4. 4S1isadashpot type switch. When the switch is pushed, a piston forces air out of the cylinder
through a one-way valve. The piston is slowly returned by a spring and by air re-entering the cyl-
inder through an adjustable orifice. The time required to return determines the duration of 4DS1.
4S1 on G2 style collimators is an electronic type switch. When the switch is pushed, an electronic
timer controls internal contacts which control light duration.

6-20
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

SEC. 10 MOTOR CONTROL

The operator controls the motor speed by rotating a potentiometer (6R1 96,D) on the brake handle,
illustration 1-2, Chapter 1. The potentiometer (6R1) voltage is combined with a sawtooth voltage to
control the conduction of 8A109 and Q10(101,F)which regulate motor current and hence motor speed.

Power transistors 8A109 and 8A1Q10 are controlied by a pulse width modulated signal applied to the
base of 8A109. The period of the transistors remains constant but the on and off times are adjusted to
give a desired average current. As the on pulses become wider and the off pulses shorter more current
flows through the motor resulting in a higher speed. See W59.

When the brake handle is depressed 6LS1 (95,F) closes to apply power to the motor drive system and
start 8A102 (96,F) oscillating (W-51). The sawtooth output of 8A1Q3 (w-52) is combined with the DC
voltsge from 6R1 (Speed Control) and 8A1R15 (max. speed adjust) to provide pulse width modulation
bias for 8A105.

Pulse width modulation of 8A1Q5 is achieved in the following manner.

+V

SLOW SPEED
SHADED AREA — Q5 CONDUCTS

Q5 TURN OFF
BIAS VOLTAGE
M Ày \
“Ll —
мм
N N / GUTwePUT
- —

DC BIAS
FROM 6R1
0 >
T
18790-010
ILLUSTRATION 6-17

The frequency and amplitude of the output of 8A 103 remains constant but the DC bias from 6R1 is
changed by the operator. At a slow speed 6R1 applies high DC bias causing 8A105 to conduct for a
short time (shaded area) and remain off for a long time; Illustration 6-17.

When the operator applies less DC bias, SA105 conducts for a longer period of time (shaded area, lilus-
tration 6-18). In this manner the operation controls the conduction time of 8A1Q5 resulting in a pulse
modulated output. Examples of the pulse modulated output of 8A105 are shown in W-53 and W-54.

6-21
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS . AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM AO654E

+V HIGH SPEED
SHADED AREA — Q§ CONDUCTS

NN
OUTPUT

Z,
(274

ジグ
| OF 8A103

2
=
Q5 TURN OFF AN N
BIAS VOLTAGE
| DC BIAS
FROM 6R1

0
18789-D10

ILLUSTRATION 6-18

8A1Q6, 7 and 8 amplify the power of the signal from 8A1Q5 before it is applied to the base of 8A 109.
Therefore, the conduction of 841010 determines the current through the motor and the speed of the
motor.

Normal operation at full speed requires a peak motor currents of about 3 amps. If a fault in the drive
system occurs 8A2, R2, R3, R4 prevent excessive motor current and limit the amount of torque dev-
eloped.

When the operator selects reverse, 6GS2 switches in an additional 10Q resistor, 8A2R1 which further limits
the torque developed in reverse.

SEC. 11 OSCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORMS

The oscillograms that follow were made with a Tektronix 422 oscilloscope and a C-30 camera.

For the waveforms, the letter w followed by a number identifies the point in the circuit where the voltage
appears. Using that number and the coordinates given with it, the waveforms may be located on the
schematics in Chapter 7. Traces were taken in standby conditions unless specified otherwise.

6-22
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNİT
7-1576 SM A0654E

UJT oscillator providing trigger signals to

60-Hz inverter driver.

PROBE: Emitter of 3A5023

GND: 3TB1-5
H: 2-ms/div
У: .5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO

Voltage across 60-Hz inverter driver pilot

SCR's

CH1-PROBE: Collector of 3A5019

CH2-PROBE: Collector of 3A5Q20
GND: 3TB1-5
H: 2-ms/div
V: .S-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Trig.

Voltage across 60-Hz inverter driver

transistors (use to check frequency also)

CH1~PROBE: Cathode of 3A5CR46

CH2-PROBE: Cathode of 3A5CR50
GND: 3TB1-5
H: 2-ms/div
У: .5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

Frequency is correct if period of one

one cycle is 16-ms to 16.5-ms.

W3 (18,F & 18,C)

6-23
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

60-Hz inverter driver output

CH1-PROBE: Cathode of 3A5CR46

CH2-PROBE: Cathode of 3A5CR50
GND: Cathode of 3A5CR30
H: 5-ms/div
У: l-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
Voltage across J5-7 and J5-21 is the sum
у E of two shown above, varying 40-v above
AE — : ei and below O-v.

W4-A (Upper) W4-B (Lower) (19,E)

60-Hz inverter SCR gate signals

CHL-PROBE: 3TS1-3
CH2-PROBE: 3TS1-1
GND: 3TS1-2.
H: 5-ms/div
У: 1l-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

W5-A (Upper] WS-B (Lower] (20,C-G]

60-Hz inverter output, press ROTOR button

to obtain trace

CHL-PROBE: Cathode (Black lead) of

3CR4-A
GND: Cathode (Brown lead) of
3CR4-B
H: 5-ms/div.
V: 10-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO

w6 (22,E)

6-24
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

М7-А: Power to X-Ray Tube Stator. Press

ROTOR button to operate.
PROBE: 3TB1-30
GND: 3TB1-14 ノ СН
H: 5-ms/div
Vs 10-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point.

W7-B: Power to x-ray tube filament

transformer. Press ROTOR button tc
operate.

PROBE: 3TB1-8
GND: 3TB1-14 ) CHI
Set up scope as for W/-A
W7-A (Upper) W7-B (Lower) 24,D)

1 W8-A: Power to main winding of x-ray tube

stator. Press ROTOR button to
operate.
PROBE: 3TB1-30
GND: 3TB1-28 CHI
H: 5-ms/div
Vs 10-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
W8-B: Power to phase shifted winding
of x-ray tube stator. Press ROTOR
button to operate
PROBE: 3TB1-30
GND: 3TB1-29 CHL
Set up scope as for W8-A.

W8-A (Upper) W8-B (Lower) (24,E)

W9-A: Voltage proportional to current

in x-ray tube stator main winding.
Press ROTOR button to operate
PROBE: 3TB1-28 \
GND: 3TB1-14 CHL
H: 5-ms/div
Vs 0.2-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

W9-B: Voltage across ROTOR interlock

sensor. Press ROTOR button to
operate.
PROBE: J2-29
GND: 3TB1-14 ) CHL
Set up scope as for W9-A.

W9-A (Upper) W9-B (Lower) (25,F)

6-25
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

WIO-A: Signal indicating that 3A2V5 has

been actuated. This closes an
interlock in the exposure start
circuit. Press ROTOR button to
operate.
PROBE: Left side of 3A4R63 ) CHL
GND: 3TB1-5
Hs 50-ms/div
Vs 0.2-v/div x 10 (probe)
-TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point.

WLO-B: Same as WIO-A except H is

5-ms/div to show waveform during
run conditions.
WLO-A (Upper) W10-B Lower (24,F)

Wil-A: Trigger voltage for gates of

filament power control SCR.
Press ROTOR button to operate.
WLL-B is same except 180° out of
phase.

PROBE: Cathode of 3A2CR23

усн:
GND: Anode of 3A2CR23
Hs 5-ms/div
V: .05-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point.
WL1-C: Trigger voltage at gates of fila-
ment power control SCR, Press
WLI-A & B (Upper) ROTOR button to operate. wl1-D
W11-C а В (Lower) (26,E-C) is same except 180° out of phase.
PROBE: Upper end of 3A2R19 CHI
GND: Lower end of 3A2R19
Set scope up as for WIO-A..

W12-A: Signal indicating that 3A2V13

has been actuated. This closes
an interlock in the exposure
start circuit. Press ROTOR
button to operate.
PROBE: Top of 3A2R14
GND: Bottom of 3A2R14 CH1
Hs 0.l-sec/div .
Vs 0.5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

W12-B: Same as W12-A except H is 5-ms/div

W12-A (Upper) W12-B (Lower) (27,4) to show waveform during run
conditions.

6-26
 MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
GENERAL ELECTRIC
SM A0654E
7-1576

W13-A: Signal indicating current in 7T2

filament transformer primary.
This actuates 3A2V13. Press
ROTOR button to operate.
PROBE: Left side of 3A4R5
GND: 3TB1-5 Sena
0.2-sec/div
Vs 0.2-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

W13-B: Same as W13-A except H is

5=ms/div to show waveform during
run conditions.
W13-A (Upmer) W13-B (Lower) (27,B)

W14-A: X-Ray tube filament transformer

7T2 primary voltage. Press
ROTOR button to operate.
PROBE: 7TB1-XS сна
GND: 7TB1-XC
MAAUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUULUUUL 0.2-sec/div
ーー | Ve 10-v/div x 10 (probe)
ο ΠΠ μα. TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO

W14-B: Same as Wl4-A except center

portion of trace shows change
in voltage during an 80-kvp,
100-mas exposure.
Wi4-A (Upper) W14-B (Lower) 28,B)

Wl4=C: Same as W14-A except H is 2-ms/div

to show expanded waveform under
warm-up conditions prior to the
exposure (during rotor start).

Wl4-D: Same as W14-C except trace was

made during an exposure. Note
that conduction time per pulse
has increased
wl4-C (Upper) W14-D (Lower) (28,8)

6-27
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-1i X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

Wl5: X-Ray exposure turn-on signal

at gate of 2CR2. Depress Rotor
and X-Ray buttons.

X-Ray Control

ο ο...
70KVP
8MAS
Probe: 3AG-1
Gnd: 3A6=2
H: 19-mx/div.
У: +02 V/div. x 10 (probe)
a

Trig: INT, DC, +, Set Point

2CR2 is turned on by first spike of volt

у

voltage 0.5V or more.

W15 C)
>
O

W16: X-Ray exposure turn-off signal

at gate of 2CR1. Depress ROTOR
and X-RAY buttons to operate.
PROBE: 3A6-5
GND: 3a6-6 CHL
H: S-ms/div
V; 0.l-v/div
x 10 (probe)

Only the end of the 40-ms expo

sure of
W15 is shown here. A 0.5-v or larger
spike of voltage will turn off the
ex-
posure.

W17-A: Power for shut-off capacitor

W16 (35,D)
Charge circuit. Absence of
this voltage locks out the ex-
posure circuit. Depress ROTOR
button to operate.
3TB1-15
3TB1-5 CHL
S-ms/div
10-v/div x 10 (probe)
INT, DC, +, Set Point

Capacitor 1C2 charges to -80-v

prior to an exposure. Depress
ROTOR button to obtain this.
PROBE: 3TB1-1
GND: 2TB1-6 cHl
H: 0.5-sec/div
W17-A (Upper) W17-B (Lower) 2-v/div x 10 (probe)
(35.F)

6-28
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W18: UJT oscillator providing trigger

signals to the 500-Hz inverter
driver. Press ROTOR button to
operate. |
PROBE: Emitter of 3A3023
GND: _ 3TB1-5
H: .5-ms/div
νι .5-v/div x 10 (probe)
INT, DC, +, Set Point

Period for two pulses must be 1.95-ms

to 2.05-ms

W138 (40,F)

#19: Signal provided by pilot SCR's tc

the iverter driver SCR's.
Depress ROTOR button to operate.
CHI-PROBE: Collector of 3A3045
CH2-PROBE: Collector of 3A3049
GND: 3TB1-5
rov H: .5-ms/div
У: 2-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
Waveforms A and B must be 180° out of
phase as shown and with the time per
¿19-A (Upuer) Η19-Β (Lower) (41,C-E) cycle shown.
P-P voltage must be 42+ 4V.
Period for one cycle must be 1.95-ms
-Ov to 2.05-ms.

W20: Voltage across inverter driver.

Depress ROTOR button to operate.
CHI-PROBE: Collector of 3A3019
CH2-PROBE: Collector of 3A3020
GND: 3TB1-S
H: .5-ms/div
V: 2-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO
Peak voltage must be 20 + 3V.
Period for one cycle must be 1.95-ms to
2.05-ms

W20-A (Upper) W20-B (Lower) (42,B-F)

6-29
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W-21: Voltage proportional to base

current of 3A3019 and 20.
Press ROTOR button to operate.
CHI-PROBE: Top of 3A3R16
CH2-PROBE: Top of 3A3R17
GND: Bottom of 3A3R16 or 17
Hs l-ms/div
Vs 1.0-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: CH1, INT, DC, +, Set Point

W21-A (Upper) W21-B (Lower) (41,D)

W22-A: Voltage for base of 3A3Q55.

Press ROTOR Button to operate.
PROBE: Top of 3A3R57
GND: 3TB1-11
Hs l-ms/div
Vs 0.5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
W22-B: Voltage for base of 3A3Q55.
PROBE: Top of 3A3R60
GND: 3TB1-11
Hs l-ms/div
Vs 0.2-v/div x 10 (probe)
W22-C: Output signal from 3A3Q55.
PROBE: Bottom of 3A3R56
GND: 3TB1-11
W22-A (Top) W22-B (Center) Hs l-ms/div
W22-C (Bottom) (43,E V: 1.0-v/div x 10 (probe)

W23-A 4 B: Output of 500-Hz inverter

driver. Press ROTOR button to
operate.
CHL-PROBE: Cathode of 3A3CR50
CH2-PROBE: Cathode of 3A3CR46
GND: Cathode of 3A3CR30
Н: l-ms/div
Vs 2.0-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

NOTE: 3T1 has 1 to 1 ratio. So voltages

of 3T1 Sec 1 and 3T1 Sec 2 are
similar to W23-A and B except for
slight drop in transformation.

W23-A (Upper) W23-B (Lower) (45 ,C-E)

6-30
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W243 Gate trigger voltages for 500-Hz

“inverter SCR's, 2CR3 and 2CR6.
Press ROTOR and X-RAY buttons to
operate.
CHI-PROBE: Top of 3A3R8
CH2-PROBE: Bottom of 3A3R28
GND: 2TB1-4
Hs 1-ms/div
Vs 0.2-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

W253 Output of 500-Hz inverter.

Select 80 kvp, 10-mas. Depress
ROTOR and X-RAY button to
operate,
CH1-PROBE: 2TB1-7
CH2-PROBE: 2TB1-9
GND: 2TB1-2
Hs 1-ms/div
V; 5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO

W25-A (Upper) W25-B (Lower) (48,C-F)

W26: High Voltage Transformer

primary voltages. Select
| ΜΜ μα μα
technics listed. Depress
κα αλλ
ROTOR and X-RAY buttons
TE η

to operate.
TECHNIC FOR A: 110-kvp, 8-mas
В: 90-kvp, 8-mas
С: 70-Кур, 8-таз
0: 50-kvp, 8-mas
АТ
가 PROBE: 2TB1-PLL
m GND: 2TB1-P2L
OS σον
Hs 10-ms/div
EEE 때 у: S-v/div x 10 (probe)
ιδ να TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
W26-A-D (50,A-G)

6-31
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E
了 W26: High Voltage Transformer
Te datti ο κ κκ ο ο. primary voltages. Select
На i
technics listed. Depress
ROTOR and X-RAY buttons to
operate
TECHNIC FOR E - 100-kvp, 8-mas
F - 80-kvp, 8-mas
G - 60-kvp, 8-mas
PROBE: 2TBI-PIL
GND: 2TB1-P2L
H: 10-ms/div
V: 5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
— a |
аня A
いい いいいい adí
ON
ο οο ο μμ

W26-E to G (50,A-G)

W27: Power Supply for x-ray ON

light circuit. Press ROTOR
button to operate.
CH1-PROBE: Anode of 3A2CR37
CH2-PROBE: Cathode of 3A2CR38
GND: Cathode of 3A2CR50
0.5-ms/div
2.0 v/div x 10 (probe)
1.0 v/div x 10 (probe)
INT, DC, +, Set Point.

W28A: Voltage at base of 3A2Q46

before and during 80-kvp,
2.5-mas x-ray exposure. Press
ROTOR and X-RAY buttons to
operate
CHL-PROBE: Top of 3A2R48
CH2-PROBE: Top of 3A2R44
| GND: Cathode of 3A2CR50
Н: 10-ms/div
CH1 =Vs 0.1-v/div x 10 (probe)
CH2-V: 1.0-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: CH1, INT, DC, +, Set Point
W28B: Voltage across 3A2Q46 before
and during 80-kvp, 2.5-mas
x-ray exposure.

W28-A (Upper) W28-B (Lower) (55,B)

6-32
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W29-A: Voltage at base of 3A2Q39

(X-Ray ON light switch) during
exposure. Press ROTOR and
X-RAY buttons to operate.
CH1-PROBE: Bottom of 3A2R40
GND: Base of 3A2Q39
Hs - al sec/div
V; 0.02 v/div x 10(probe)
TRIG:
W29-B: Voltage across 5DS5 x-ray ON
light.
PROBE: 3TB1-25
GND: 3TB1-9
H: .l-sec/div
Vs +5-v/div x 10(probe)

W30-A: Voltage proportional to MA in

the HV transformer secondary
and x-ray tube. Press ROTOR
and X-RAY buttons to operate.
PROBE: Across 100-ohm resistor in
GND: ゝ the MA terminal sockets.
2-ms/div |
“Vs 0.2-v/div x 10(probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point

W30-B: Same as W30-A except H is

10-ms/div

W30-B (54,C)
6-33
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-U X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W31-A: Signal voltage proportional to

MA for ma regulator actuation.
Press ROTOR and X-RAY buttons
to operate.
PROBE: Top of 3A2C55
GND: Bottom of 3A2C55
Hs 20-ms/div
Vs 0.2-v/div x 10(probe)
UPPER TRACE: Filament voltage too high and
regulator pulling down or fila-
ment voltage normal but
regulator pulling down improper
ly.
NÍ CENTER TRACE: Filament voltage correct and ma
regulator adjusted correctly.
BOTTOM TRACE: Filament voltage too low and ma
regulator pulling up or filament
voltage normal but regulator
pulling up improperly.

Signal proportional to ma for

ο...

W31-B:
ma regulator. Press ROTOR and
X-Ray buttons to operate.
W31-C: Reference voltage for ma regula
tor
tts

CHI-PROBE: Base of 3A2Q63

CH2-PROBE: Base of 3A2Q60
tad

GND: Common of 3A2R56 and 58

Hs 10-ms/div
ryt

V; O.1-v/div x 10(probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, set point
EXP: 50-kvp, 10-mas
Traces superimpose sooner at best adjustment

W32: Typical balance adjustment

voltages of 3A2Q60 and 3A2Q63.
CH1-PROBE: Collector of 3A2Q60
CH2-PROBE: Collector of 3A2Q63
GND: Between 3A2R56 and 58
H: 5-ms/div
CHl-V: 0.5-v/div x 10(probe)
CH2-V: 1.0-v/div x 10(probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
Depress RQTOR button only
UPPER:
Depress ROTOR and X-RAY buttons.
LOWER:
Note that thee settings of CH1 and CH2
were different to keep traces from
superimposing on the photo.
W32-A (Upper) W32-B (Lower) (58,E)

6-34
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

W33A: Signal that 500-Hz inverter is

functioning. Press ROTOR (and
X-RAY optional) buttons to
operate.
PROBE: Base of 3A1Q56
GND: Emitter of 3A1Q56.
10-ms/div
у: 0.l-v/div x 10(probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO
W33B: Signal that shut off capacitors
are charged. Press ROTOR and
X-RAY buttons. Square top
pulses show voltage during
ROTOR run up. Bottom line is
voltage after exposure.
PROBE: Base of 3A1Q60
A GND: Emitter of 3A1Q60
W33-A (Upper) W33-B (Lower) (85 ,F) : 10-ms/div
Vs 0.1-v/div x 10(probe)

W353 Signal for exposure start.

Depress ROTOR and X-RAY buttons
to operate.
PROBE: 3A64
GND: 3TB1-5
H: 5-ms/div
V: „05 v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
Only the high negative spike starts
the exposure. Remainder is pickup
from the inverters.

CAUTION: DO NOT REVERSE SCOPE CONNEC-

TIONS. EXPOSURE MAY FAIL TO TERMINATE,
W35 (79,F)

6-35
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS … AMX-II X-RAY UNIT

10-377 SM A0654E
W35: Exposure stop signal to turn-
off SCR (2CRL) gate.
PROBE: 3A6-7
GND: 3TBl-11
H: 5-ms/div
V: 0.5 v/div x 10
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO
Stop pulse signal is highest peak at ex-
treme right. Remainder of waveforms are
60-Hz and 500-Hz inverter pick up voltages.

CAUTION: DO NOT REVERSE SCOPE CONNECTIONS.

EXPOSURE MAY NOT TERMINATE.

W36-A (82,F)

RE:
NE 3 W37: Interval Timer adjustment
MN nu W37-A: Exposure interval for 50-kvp
| 10-MAS selection
σα W37-B: Exposure interval for 50-kvp
100-mas selection.
PROBE: 2TB1-1
GND: 2TB1-3
H: (for upper trace) 20-ms/div
H: (for lower trace) 0.2 sec/div
У: 5-v/div x 10(probe)
Note that with increased intensity
(upper trace) it is possible to see
the turn off spike. Adjustment could
be for slightly shorter interval than
shown.
W37-A (34,D-30,F)

6-36
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
10-377 © SM A0654E

W39: Kvp across x-ray tube as shown

by HV bleeder and scope.
CH1-PROBE:
Anode - Terminals on HV
CH2-PROBE: Cathode
bleeder
GND: Ground
H: ‘0.1 sec/div and 5-ms/div
Vs 2-v/div x 10(probe) x 1000
(bleeder)
MODE : Algebriac addition
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
Press ROTOR and X-RAY buttons to operate.
TECHNICS SELECTED:

W39-A 110 kvp, 100 mas

W39-B 90 kvp, 100 mas
W39-C 70 kvp, 100 mas
W39-A (Upper) W39-B,C,D W39-D 50 kvp, 100 mas
W29-E 100 kvp, 5 mas
W39-F 80 kvp, 5 mas
W39-G 60 kvp, 5 mas

IA 人 人 Apr deデア ーー ンー ニーデー デー デー ゲー ニン ーーアー ケー アー ニラ ニン た

u
ES i i
... fat. ο e e

LDL si akman ООО

W39-E (Upper) W39-B,C,D

W40-A: No load and load voltages at

input of battery charger.
PROBE: 4A1-9
CHL
GND: 4Ai-10
H: 5-ms/div
У: 10-v/div x 10(probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO
Sine wave is no-load-clipped sine wave is
load voltage.

W40-A
6-37
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Ii X-RAY UNIT
10-377 SM A0654E

W40-B: Charge complete voltages at

output of rectifier 4CR1
CH1 PROBE: 4A1-8
CH2 PROBE: 4A1-8 MODE: Added Invert CHI
H: 5-ms/div
V: 5-v/div x 10 (probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO

W40-BC Charger “on” load voltage at out-

put of Rectifier 4CR1
Setup same as W40-A

Base voltages of 4A1Q10

Between 4ALR9 and 4ALR4
o Base of 4ALQIO

E
n m
di 一 +一 | ně ~

in 1 5-ms/div
一 = Vi .05-v/div x 10(probe)
1
| À TRIG: INT, DC, +, AUTO
High pulses appear as battery charges.
Small square wave appears just before the
solid top line indicate s charge complete.
| OS W41-B:Base voltages of 4A1Q7
a. и РВОВЕ: Base of 4A1Q7
È one GND: Cathode of 4ALCR22
H and V as for W4i-A
Lower trace of pulses appear (up to 12-y
below 0 line) as battery charges. Higher
pulse trace is just before battery charge
W41-A (Upper) W41-B (Lower) (7,C)
complete. Top line is voltage as charge
complete lamp comes on.

W42: Gate voltages of battery charge

control SCR (4CR3)
PROBE: 4Al-&
GND: 4А1-2
H: 5-ms/div x 10
V for A: O.l-v/div x 10(probe)
V for B: 0.5-v/div x 10(probe)
Zero is centerline of graticule for both

TERASA, shows turn-on voltage while

Bettery is charging.
W41-R: Suows negative bias when
CHARGE COMPLETE LAMP IS ON.

W42-A (Upper) W42-B (Lower) (5,B)

6-38
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-iI X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

CHAPTER 6

AMX- II

MOTOR CONTROL WAVEFORMS

The oscillograms that follow were made with a Tektronix 422 oscilloscope and a C-30
Camera. Probe connections, scope setting and operating conditions are given for
each.

For the waveforms, the letter W followed by a number identifies the point.in the
circuit at which the voltage appears on page 10 of the schematics in Chapter 6.

w-51
1K Hz sawtooth from UJT oscillator
8A1-02

Ch 1 probe: Plus side of 8Al-C2

GND: 8A1-1
H: 0.5 ms/div
У: O.5-V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +, Set Point
Speed Control - zero
Brake Handle - down

=>

W-52
Output of emitter follower 8A1-03

Ch 1 probe: Emitter of 8A1-03

GND: 8A1-1
H: 0.5 ms/div
У: 0.5 V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +, Set Point
Speed Control - zero
Brake Handle - down

W-52
6-39
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-li X-RAY UNİT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W-53
Output of 95 at low and max. speeds.

Ch 1 Probe: Collector of 8A1-5

GND: 8А1-1
H: 0.5 mx/div |
V: 0.5 v/áiv x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +, Set Point
Speed Control ; 53-A, max
53-B, slow
Spikes shoule expand to the right as
speed is increased

W-53A er) (Lower)

max- speed slow speed
W-54
Comparing the input and output of
Q5 at slow speed.

W-54A: Same as W-53

W-54B: Same as W-52 except ~
V: 1.0 v/aiv x 10 probe
Speed Control - slow
Brake Handle - down

W-54A
Cutie PP85)
WS
WTaSbt (©
wer)

W-54
Comparing the input. and output of
8A1-05 at max. speed.

W-54C: Same as W-54A

W-54D: Same as W-54B

Speed Control - max.

Brake Handle - down

W-54C (Upper) W-54D (Lower)

Output of 05 Input of 05

6-40
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
77-1576
SM A0654E

W-55
Output of 8A1-06 at low and high speed.

‘ch 1 Probe: Collector of 8Al-06

GND: SAl-1
H: 0.5 ms/div
У: 0.5 V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, + Set Point

Brake Handle-- down

Uefa SERIO W-55B

max.
(Lower)
spe
W-56
Voltage across load resistor 8A1-R23 for
different speeds.
|
hi

|i tt

Ch l Probe: Junction of R21 and R23

GND: Collector of 07
H: 0.5 ms/div
V: 0.5 V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +, Set Point
|| |

Brake Handle - down

|
|
|| |

W-56A (Upper) W-56B (Lower)

max. speed slow speed

W-57
Output of 8Al-08 for different speeds.

Ch 1 Probe: Emitter of 08
GND: 8А1-1
H: 0.5 ms/div
V: 0.5 V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +, Set Point

Brake Handle - down

W-57A (Upper) W-57B (Lower)

slow speed max. speed
6-41
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

W-59
ri ἥ Output of 8A1-09 during run conditions.

|
|
|
‘ i
r р
H + i
1 +
i を Ch 1 Probe: Base of Q10
; A ~ i
+ ia i GND: 8A1-1
H? 0.5 ms/div
У: .05 V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +, Set Point

Brake Handle - down

W-59A (Upper) W-59B (Lower)

slow. E d max. speed

W-60
Output voltage to drive motor 6B2.

Ch 1 Probe: 8AL-5
GND: 8Al-6 -
H: 0.5 ms/div
V: S. V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, +,Set Point

Brake Handle - down

W-60A (Upper) W-60B (Lower)

max. speed slow speed

6-42
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654£

W-61
Overload protection circuit. Wave
form shows circuit during normal
operating condition.

Ch l Probe: Base оЕЁ 8А1-01

GND: Collector of 8A1-04
H: 0.5 ms/div
V: 1.0 V/div x 10 probe
Trig: Int, AC, + Set Point

Brake Handle - down

W-61A (Upper) W-61B (Lower)

slow speed max. speed

6-43
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 SM A0654E

CHAPTER 7
SCHEMATICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PANEL IDENTIFICATION TABLE
RELAY FUNCTION CHART
SCHEMATICS | SHEET NO.
BATTERY CHARGER (ALL MODELS) WITH NEW FUSE LOCATION .. 1
BATTERY CHARGER (ALL MODELS) WITH NEW CHARGER ASM. ... TA
60 Hz INVERTER CIRCUIT |
Models 46-165600G10 Thru G12 ...... M eres 2
TUBE STATOR & FILAMENT: COLLIMATOR LIGHT (ALL MODELS).. 3

500 Hz INVERTER ON—OFF SWITCHES (ALL MODELS) ......... ... 4

500 Hz INVERTER CIRCUITS (ALL MODELS) .................... 5

MA CIRCUITS (ALL MODELS) ,, eneee 6

H. V. RECTIFIERS AND TUBE UNIT (ALL MODELS) ............. . 7

DELAY AND INTERLOCK CIRCUITS
Models 46-165600G10 Thru G12 ........... ııı 8
TRIGGER, TIMER AND OVERLOAD CIRCUITS
Units Below Ser. No. 346320 ..... e 。 오 9

TRIGGER, TIMER AND OVERLOAD CIRCUITS ー |

Units 346320 and Above....................... e. 9A

MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITS (ALL MODELS) ...................... 10

GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
7-1576 SM A0654E

AMX-110 PANEL IDENTIFICATION TABLE

PANEL COMPONENT PREFIX

X—RAY CONTROL CABINET . 1—

INVERTER ASSEMBLY 2—

CARD RACK ASSEMBLY | 3—

Timer and Overload Board 3A1—
Filament & MA, Regulator Board 3A2—
500 Hz Inverter Driver Board 3A3—
Time Delay Board | 3A4—
60 Hz Inverter Driver Board 3A5—
Pulse Board 3A6—

BATTERY CHARGER ASSEMBLY 4—

Battery Charger CKT. Board |. 4A1—

OPERATOR'S PANEL 5一

AMX CHASSIS | 6—
H.V. TRANSFORMER | 7一

INTERCONNECTION PANEL 8—

MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY & BOARD 8A1—

DRIVE ASSIST PANEL 8Α2--

X—RAY TUBE UNIT None

BATTERY ASSEMBLY | None

COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY | 4—
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
6-978 SM A 0654E

RELAY RELAY NAME CONTACT SCHEMATIC

COIL AND LOCATION ENERGIZED BY CONTACT FUNCTION LOCATION

1K1 500 Hz inverter safety Output of 60 Hz inver A Connect 500 Hz inverter to 9,C
(115 VAC) turn-off when handswitch ROTOR B battery power 13,D
is pressed 37,C
(25C)

3K1 60 Hz inverter control Closing 3A4K32-A by A Connect 60 Hz inverter to 14,B

(24 VDC) depressing handswitch B battery power 36,8
ROTOR button C 73,8
(77,C)

3K2 Battery charger inter- Connecting charger to A Disconnect battery power from 13.C 9,C
(115 VAC) lock 115-VAC power X-ray control circuits when 36,C 73,C
battery is being charged
B Connect battery to charger when = 13,C 10,C
5S1-A is charge only | 36,C 73,8
(2,F) C Disconnect motor drive when 95,D
charge cord is plugged in.

3K3 500 Hz inverter 3 sec. Depressing handswitch A Opens supply voltage to 1K1 after 25,C
safety turn-off X-ray button 3 seconds
(83,D) |

3A1K7 X-Ray exposure start Depressing handswitch A Remove the short across gate 86,F
(24 VDC) X-RAY button to cathode of 3A1CR28 and
allow it to be triggered on
(83,C)

3A4K2 Inverter function sensor Proper response to sensors B Close circuit to ready light 81,8
(24 VDC) and exposure start time in inverter and filament and prepare exposure start
(79,8) delay and rotor circuits and circuits
completion of time delay

3A4K5 Turn-off capacitor power Closure of 3A4K2 and A Opens power supply used to 39,C
(24 VOC) disconnect Exposure switch charge exposure stop capa-
3A1CR28 “ON” citors 1C2 during exposure.

(82, C)

3A4K22 60 Hz and 500 Hz Inverter Time delayed circuit B Connects battery power to 10,C,14,C
(24 VOC) driver turn on after depressing hand- inverter driver circuits 37,8,74,8
」 . switch rotor.
(76,C)

3A4K36 Preparation Depressing handswitch B Connect inverter driver and 10.C69.B |

(24 VDC) ROTOR button or exposure control circuits É
(74,E) COLL. FIELD LITE

7-2
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
6-978 = | SM A 0654E

RELAY RELAY NAME | CONTACT SCHEMATIC

COIL AND LOCATION ENERGIZED BY CONTACT FUNCTION LOCATION

4A1K23 Charge complete shut-off Charging battery to 131- A Change charger turn on point so 8,F
(24 VOC) 132V the battery must discharge awhile
before the charger turns on again
(7,C) B Turn on CHARGE COMPLETE 5,D
lamp turn off 4CR3

6CB1 Circuit breaker | Current overioad — Disconnects battery when battery 12,E
9,E 60,E - current drain is excessive ог 32,0 9.0
12,F 72,E | Charge Rate 35,D
35,F 94,F . Excessive 72.0
32,E 94, D

8K1 Collimator light Depressing handswitch D Prevents exposures when 25,D

(32, F ROTOR BUTTON Collimator light is on by opening
Circuit for 1K1

C Complete Primary transformer 29, C

(8T1) Collimator light circuit

F Picks up relay 75, Е

3A4K36 to apply power to
60 Hz inverter

B Prevent power to stator 25, D

when Coilimator light is on

8A2K1 - Drive Assist Drive Assist 8 Shorts 8A2R2 to increased 103, C

95, C Push Button motor torque
| 6S5

8K1 RELAY CONTACTS

た N
A=>
ZE
“as; +
ЕС
=

ca ip , =
B δε, ” e? F
<
GO. г ==

es. „ ~
΄ ^^.
“
+

Coil 2-2 Coil, |

+

K = "+ テー

15863-R11

7-3
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E
| "ON IHS - 13 NO INO3

GENERAL ELECTRIC 30466-D20 |

“ON ONTAVHO) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED USE THE FOLLOWING:- [rev AB TITL E CONT ON SHEET — SHT NO 1
APPLIED PRACTICES SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
METER BOARD
CONT ON SHEET — SHT NO. 1 FIRST MADE FOR AMX GENERATOR

J 1 46-1884946G1-A
NOT 1 ぐーオーーーー
USED 402
10
4ai-6 — <S<+ L | +24V

κ“TO 4|
581-415 3A/ _ +120V

R8
| CRS 300 R14
| RISO P
1N5221B
913
IA
^
oye | TP 1 S06. TP2 2N3417

+ R7 CR9 <
| ヴー SMI 4
1N4148
CR6
| (3) 1N935
9,0V

| CR12 19。1K
È 1N823 196
| 6.2ν 0.12%
TO
3TB1-11 4 A b
10,F AS | ον
NOT USED 2¢—+——+ BATTERY
CONDITION
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:
ALL RESISTORS АВЕ 1/4\,596
AND ARE IN OHMS.

REVISIONS PRINTS TO

ALL DEVICES SHOWN TOP VIEW B|DUS 9/MAY/79 | 407

GENERAL CHANGES

E C B

2N3417
SYSTEMS ver.
MADE BY

1660 fo | b fume 79
Baur | PROS [MEDICAL
MILWAUKEE, WI. ocarrou o о

7-6
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX- X-RAY UNIT

1-1582 SM A0654E |
2 3 | 24 25 ! 26 | 27 i 28 29 | 30 —
| 3 32 33
て owns + 43398 NO ¿900 |
[o A ELECTRIC
GENERAL | 23596-D42
ZvO-96SEZ | i T Tcont
on smEET A sumo
TUBE STATOR AND FILAMENT POWER,COLL. LIGHT
FIRST MADE FOR AMX- li ALL MODELS
REVISIONI

A 3J2- 33 3A2R14 3J2 -19

?
1
e
八
AAA 1

| 3 A2VI3 Ó 3TB1-18
| ρι 581 b_n
| <一 一、
—

у 312-23 ‹ 342-21

ТО INPUT OF SENSOR FOR

VARO BRIDGE FILAMENT O7TBI-XS
3A2CR6 AT INTERLOCK
B 61,0 CIRCUIT
コーーーー WI3 一 一一 一 +
4 y y Г |

SEE 81,F SEE 81,C X5

3TBI-8
<

m RED FILAMENT FILAMENT |

i T RANSFORMER TRANSFORMER 4P2-C -
PRIMARY SECONDARY WI4 < _
TO TO (800 (96 TURNI -
ANODE OF BASE 2 OF TURNS) SEE X-RAY TUBE
TO 3A2CR23 3A2026 AT 69,E |
7 COLLIMATOR SEE 64,F «ΕΕ 64 Ε .
XC 207111-P11 4DSI 一二 一 <
C LIGHT CKT «м-в — > CTRA COLLIMATOR 8
3A2TIB ) (| LIGHT
4 PRIMARY 3 À o
> 3A2R15 2 ーー ト 、
Sik 2 1 ( 6CBI
POLLY
ο 一 |
一 一NY一NY Nem , ㅣ

3A2T 18 i TBTO 人 7 ) < i! A |© +

-
7 A
SEC 2 O 7TBI-XC
m
- 3A2RI9 | 1 =
ANA , 一 8F2
IK MODELS 46-165600GI0Q thur G12 i — BA 1
一一WII-C - | 3A2CR20 =
=
C6B b

O =
| =
PSN
—D

| 一 一 8151-9
i —

3A2C33 一一
\l 3A2R32 3J2-17 | 3TBI-I2 一
100 n o = αυ
— JOA MFD ーー

Cr
3A2CRIG
cea
i =
ACTE
< -ㅡ
\11-0 D ~ L
“| gesi PUR
E 3A2RI7
K -一
3TBI-29 3TBI-28
6CBI —
303

| 5 2TB1-3
- 9777 8
3A2R3 3A2TI8
COLLIMATOR
TO J4 -3 3J2-31

SEE 81,E 332-291 5 n PRIMARY

< W- A —» 6F4 LIGHT
RELAY ΒΚΙ
25,0 7 8CRI
8A
290 IN5059 }--
TO ANODE OF
し
SENSOR
FOR ROTOR < )3А2\5 < YAZRA TO BASEOF
SSE>
F INTERLOCK
WIO PLSBI $1.51 342026 3A2CR23 |
| οι.„| 29,E し 1
CIRCUITS SEE 64,E SEE 64,F
BLK WHT
\9- 8 wee || 8TS-5 〇 ーーーo 8TS1-10
| | ROTOR
TO JI-7 31015 do ==) BUTTON
SEE 81,F 3312-23

L x-RAY TUBE — İİX-RAY TUBE FILAMENT POWER . 3 ἰ coLLIMATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT M 1 COLLIMATOR LIGHT + ー
INTERLOCK m
STATOR POWER
|

parta TO

[ave av PA ОБИ ar | 23596-D42

sueo | omar È mo
ーーーー
| 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 3I | 32 | 33
23 | 24 | 25 | 26
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM| A0654E
noe ς emo it +

LpG-96GEZ | 了 - GENERALİ ELECTRIC | 23596-D41

j == “cont om ste? SH NO
TC 60 HZ 1500 H2- INVERTER ON-OFF SWITCH
INVERTER | - имея AMX-If ALL MODELS |
TO60 Hz
3 REVISIONS

AT'4.8 inverter 218172 . Tia

à DRIVER ] T |
| SEE 15,0 |
SSI-A | 4 |
S51- 16 OF 「 一 一 5S1-14 一 2TBI-8 A7OD OR IN3292
o |
BATTERY CHARGE | 77C | W> 2
| |
CHARGER sss EE]
@ OFF
3K1 778
| y
ἵ
| 2RI M
SEE 9,8
3
< 10
551-17 O3TBI-24 |

i 3TBI-19 2C1
TN MFD
5SI- 551-13 Toaakze-8 “| 4 B
ARE 3J3-33
| rec パリ SIGNAL TO START X-RAY EXPOSURE 225 T |
| SEE CIRCUIT AT 85,F 50W
TO 3J6-4 TO 3J6-3 一 个一
AT 84,E AT 84,F
- 3CR6
INI360
— 3K2-B 24+2V 一

TO
4Y .
3TBI-5

一六 <
| > de © m

ors 回
>=
그
ki ， 十 | 3A3C37 |
3J6-2 03J6-! =. 100 MFD
|
U| <Q
J | n
|| 2CR2 ILI
O ITP2 0550 300 pHY —
IR2 FIN 2TBI-I 一一 一 2TBI-4 一
| AAN 4 し CO ARR ÆT
—
οἱ E
|
| y iCR3-
А | Г 1м5062
|+ cane ( 3467 ㅁ
+ || GEN 가 346-5 5 TO 3J6-3
-一 165 IR6 № SEE 87,G
— > Nir 9 ANN—

= | S RU 27K | 27K 3A6R4 é

120-V = < 2w 1 2W 100 WIE EXPOSURE STOP -一
BATTERY 一 | 1CR2 | 1CR1 2C2 SIGNAL FROM TIMER ||
ー | A408 | A408 O! MFD | —
| PR , OF 4 то 36-7
=
Т- | 1N1186 :1N1186 3J6-6 EE 87,
fa | ICI IC 2 3R6 ΤΟ 3J1-33 (92,E)
| L し 183 2400MFD 2400 МЕО sw SIGNAL TO TIMER SHUT OFF CIRCUIT TO E
“6CBI é —» TO 2TB1-2 6— ーーー 一- INDICATE WHEN CAPACITORS ICI AND IC2 | |
|ノ SEE 37,A 11 + 100 μα. + WI7-B FAILS TO CHARGE, SEE 87,E 0
| ITPI いい g — eT03TB1-5
6CBI 188
27K
a 163 12\ | 3CR8 3TBI-15 TO 3CR3 一
| 2W | | 900 MFO TO 3JI- 35 SEE 21,C
o-~ 一 一 一 ~ , | AT 92,0 ΙΝ5062 60 HZ
SIGNAL OF MA INVERTER OUTPUT
OVERLOAD TO WIT-A TO 3CRI | TRANSFORMER
2TBI-3 | > SEE 14, B PRIMARY PROVIDES
iГ | EXPOSURESEESTOP
CIRCUIT, POWER TO CHARGE m
000
TO 92.0 WAVEFORM F
4A1-12 OF 이카 6F4 w34 TO 3CR2\SHOWN AT 38, E
BATTERY SEE 21,6
CHARGER | Te 5
SEE 10,F | _
— —— 3 3A4KS-A
9 3TB1.5 2CR5
| | 34-31 A7OD OR IN3292 —
> > 6
1

| 2TBI-6 |
oT
| 개

ci

Lo 4 一一
| | ||
L BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -———J)
一 | INVERTER
)| 一 ON-OFF SWITCHES İİ PRIMTS TO

po M | p | ος a 23596-D41
| ' ; OL AON] COMT
Om Sorte 5 зн мо
34 35 36 T 37 i 38 39 40 4| ! 42 i 43 44
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 £065: |
45 | 46 “7 | 43 SM 4 2654Е 52 51 i 52 | 53 i 54 | 35
= | 5 GENERAL É ELECTRIC | 23596-040
一 TL 1 cont ou seer & mos MO.
ーー ANNAEET OSCILLDSEOPE
CONNECI Ch
OSCILIOSCOPE CHANNEL ! PROBE TO CATHODE OF 3AJCRAS 500-HZ INVERTER CIRCUITS
AND CHANNEL ? rPOBE TO JAJCRSO AND GROUND TC
WAVEFORM W20-A ANS S. PRESS ROTOR BUTIGN ANO ADIUST JAREE rinst wane son AMX-|! ALL MODELS
=
TO OBTAIN BETWEEN :.95 AND 2.05 MILLISECONDS PER CYCL 3TBI-P2L TO Г
А OF SQUARE WAVE VOLTAGE. 2 TTBI-P2
| | 4
AP
2 ] NUMBER КУР

nj

3 Lad 110 | |

< 100
2CR3
C55DOR 95
4
-一 一人 一 一一 一 一 3J3-33 +24+2V C155D
W24-B > TER
90 =
W20-B ~ amaaa

- 3A3CR50 3A3CR30 343-256 85

IN5060 У Nsoeo
ーーー]
> mi

80
, 1343-17 a 34308 E
2 33019 3A3049 100 ČN ο 75
< VW . Pr

1 | 2N3053 | J3-21 $
Y > 3A3L11 > 15 70 一
4) 3A3R13 z? A
< 一 27 3A3CI2 4.74 HY 3A3C6 13-14 x SLIDER DRIVEN BY KNOB
| LL 一 一.47MFD 5- KV
SASRS! Z 047MFD « E W25-A 2
220 | | < 12 |
e— WI9-B る 3A3R36 2 3A3R54 < 3A3R56 ς SASCIO 34307 O 65
$3.3K 222K 2N3053 (
一 TO SYNCH W23-B CAN [005 MFD (e E 60
W2I-B PULSE GATE-|— | o > | |
2! 343020 L SEE 91,F M NL 75304 SS > IO
3A3RI7 1 2N525 | TM DCS 33 - 35 Óm (03-23
SEE OIF 3A3R5 2N 4990 と O 55| ーー

— D 2N4990 2N697 é 3J3-27 > Sa IOOww

"1OK 3A 3Q59 3A3055 - md AAA W-26

3A3RI4 3A3RI5 IN5059

47 507 φ CA C ) BR. 3A3R44
; IN5059 IOO
ts ΑΛΑ
3 NE
Ww NOS
[4 23A3RI8 3A3RI6 Si 5 SAS C64 M
— 7 20K oN 2N525 ŠOK Al | 2 3A3R38
3A3019 « 2 5? 343039 3A3042
500 HZ INVERTER 3A3C33 T- < 343038 2N3053
FREQUENCY OI MFD 3A3C58 ο | a
ADJUSTMENT W21-A w22-A (.047MFD |w22-8 W22-C NY) Cha,
SEE ADJUSTMENT A ， >
we
Wrap ae NOS e wi9-A S 3A3R3I SASRS7 © 3A3R41 る3 343c 40 MED
OGS :
| 3A3R47 ZIK ISK 2 3A3R60 <
E 3A3R22$< AAA 470 5 İ č |
8.2 K АЗС 220 1 一 229 ζ —
.068 MFD
< 3A3C26 3A3 Ç |
|
| 047MFD 47MFD と
1 / S3A3R25 3A3L27 С 4

一 ( 3A3Q23
2N2646
1 n.
3A3045
2N3053 一人
3J3- 3
ー ]ひ
perk $
STK SA3R28
A3R
È/一
d一 二 一 一 2TPL-PIL
500 HZ 3J3-17 100 と |
OSCILLATOR pi τι 2
ペーーーW 18 3A3CR46 SEC 3 < \24-А > —
145060 + 59, В 3J3-9
F コーーーー W20 -A ーー 3A3C48 —
“人 1omF0
50 V
9 Om
2cR6N | ノ 2TBI-9
C550 OR
- С1550
6 =

т
7 1353 TO
7TBHPpl | |
G AUTOTRANSFORMER FOR し
| 500-HZ INVERTER Driver I SYNCH PULSE ft 5 0 0 - HZ INVERTER ft HV TRANSFORMER PRIMARY. f
VOLTAGE SELECTION man re
MADE BY | APPROVALS A 23596- 000
pus | on mastÈ ww
45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | £0 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 | 55

7-13
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-H X-RAY UNIT

1-1880 ^
SM A0854E
57 | 59 50 i
64 65 | | 66
Y ce rs À 133+4 NO LNOD
GENERAL
ØD ELECTRIC | 23596-D41
Oba -96S€L “| CONT
OM SHEET 7 sno.©

CATOR
TITLE

R À Ÿ 0
MA CIRCUITS

м | ND
=
rinsy Mace Fon AMX - || ALL MODELS
y REVISIONS

7TBI-P2 0-55 KVP TO GROUND

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 5:
CONNECT DC VOLTMETER PLUS (+) TO COLLECTOR OF 3A2060
AND MINUS (—) TO CATHODE OF 3A2CR7,PRESS ROTOR BUTTON
3A2CR37 AND ADJUST 3A2R64 FOR 16.5 (+/- 1.0) VOLTS.
3A2CR38 VA 3A2R45 3A2C42 RE
W29-A 2 SA2R40 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 6:
iN5059
15059 ン 1453 15 MFD BATTERY MUST BE AT FULL CHARGE. ADJUST 3A2R64 AS
'
K < K
3J2-9 3J2-7 / 50V に A2R4I
3う 3A2039 DIRECTED IN PROCEDURE 5. SET 3A2R27 TO MIDRANGE. CON-
2N5366 NECT AC IRON VANE TYPE METER ACROSS 7T81-XC AND XS.
150 (2 | 3A2CR43 10K ADJUST 3A2R30 TO OBTAIN 70 VOLTS. CONNECT AN ACCURATE
< iNSO59 | OC MILLIAMETER IN PLACE OF THE JUMPER IN THE MA TERN-
TO JA2CR49 < 2 3A2R 48 å
INALS ON PANEL 3. MAKE AN EXPOSURE AT 80-KVP. 100 MAS,
호
+ MY
W278B INSO60 IF NECESSARY, ADJUST 3A2R34 TO OBTAIN 100 MA. READ AND
3J3-21
3A20 46 RECORD XS TO XC VOLTAGE ON OTHER METER DURING AN

EA
49,C 3A2RSI
\ 2N597 W29-B EXPOSURE. WITH POWER OFF, LOCATE LEAD FROM MAIN
IK 3A2CR50 У W28A — 3А2С47 S POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER 6CB1 THAT IS ON 6CB1-B. CONNECT
IN5060 O5 MFD
10-OHM, 100 WATT ADJUSTABLE RESISTOR AND SHORTING
SIGNAL FROM 500HZ |. SWITCH, AS SHOWN BELOW, BETWEEN THE TWO LEADS ON
INVERTER DRIVER 353-13 3J2-13 y 6CB1-B. CONNECT A 0-150 DC VOLTMETER TO 2TB1-5 AND
2TB1-3. TURN POWER ON BUT DO NOT MAKE EXPOSURES.
5.0 49,F PRESS THE ROTOR BUTTON
DEVICE SHOWN BELOW AND READ VOLTAGE. ADJUST RE-
SISTOR TAP TO OBTAIN 90 (+/—5) VOLTS. ADJUST 3A2R30
BLK? < 3R7 TO OBTAIN THE FILAMENT VOLTAGE RECORDED EARLIER.
RECHECK THIS VOLTAGE WITH THE 10-OHM RESISTO
3U3-3 e
49.E 31! `’ SHORTED (SWITCH RELEASED). IF DIFFERENCE IN VOLTAGE
2W IS MORE THAN +/— 1 VOLT, ADJUST 3A2R27. REPEAT CHECKS
AND ADJUSTMENTS WITH THE 10-OHM RESISTOR IN AND OUT
UNTIL THE CHANGE IS LESS THAN 1 VOLT. REMOVE METERS,
7TI r- ¿e RESISTOR, ANDO SWITCH. REPLACE LEAD ON 2TB1:3.
1
HV REMOVE JUMPER TO INSTALL
TRANSFORMER #30 - (SCOPE ACROSS
| 100-OHM 100 スー NA METER FOR TEST 6
SEC.I RESISTOR INSERTED TEMPORARILY > 3A2RI!
11293 TURNS iN PLACE OF JUMPER 了 1.5 K
3TBI-I6 5W
S HORTING SWITCH TO
< 3A2R8 TO
C
TO > 1,5 K e ele > 2TBI-3
(TRIP UNIT COIL) 342-334 5W

x
Lİ
SEE CONTACTS SEE 24,A~
AT 12,D AND G
33 A2R29 Y= recio
Mod
wr

3A2CR54 VOLTAGE <| PS 10 MFD

7TBI-MA 3TBI-10 ROM 3A 2 R6
い ] Ion
100 W
SLIDER INITIALLY
SET FOR IO- OHMS
X-RAY TUBE
.OIO FILAMENT <
[3 342827
¡Ho

TRANSFORMER COMPENSATION ADJUSTMENT TEST CIRCUIT FOR PROCEDURE 6 INSERT INTO CKT AT 12,F.
SPARK SEE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
GAP PRIMARY “4500
CIRCUIT NO. 6 AT 64,B
Mal
РТ

3A2CR59
TT 3A2RS2 IN1767

©
TRANSFORMER 3.3 K 6.8 t1V
PRIMARY 3J2-25
J > 3A2R62 S 3A2R35
38 TURNS 100 \ ЗЕЕ 25, pa < $ 3A2R24 <
eed

<
2.2K <22K <1.5M <
3
5

3A2CR3
Ho

ra! IZC22T5
MA REGULATOR

y
s
ADJUSTMENT 20t2V (Y 3A2063 3A2CReI
SEE ADJUSTMENT f SIGNAL VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL NN 2N697 3A2026
PPOCEDURE NO, 6 TO MA FOR MA REGULATOR
IIN5059 2NI67IB
AT 64,

7TI W31-A 4 MA REGU ATOR

G TO GATE OF
3A2CRI6 AT .26,E
HV 3A2C55.|
REFE RENCE VOLTAGE
1/1+

TRANSFORMER IO MFD 77 SIGNAL TO TURN ON SCR

50V — 342022 3A2CRI6 IN THE FILAMENT
11293 TURNS W3I-C 3A2R64 OL MED

M
TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT

W3i-B BALANCE 4| 5 > 65+0Ww

ADJUSTMENT TO 3TBI-12
FOR MA W32-A AT 27,E
REGULATOR
3A2R56 < $ 3A2R58 SEE ADJUSTMENT > 3A2R6I 2 3A2R28 WII-A
47 > < 47 PROCE DURE NO5 < > 2.2 K
>
2 IOK

Çİ
À TO GATE OF
3A2CR237 À PRIMAR
3A2CR20 AT 27,D
IN5059
3A2CR7
INI773 Es FILAMENT VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT
SEE ADJUSTMENT > JA2R30
50 K
SIGNAL TO TURN ON SCR
CRZO IN THE FILAMENT
TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT
Ι2ΣΙΝ PROCEDURE NO.6— *
AT 64,8 TO INPUT OF
4
VARO BRIDGE
3A2CR6 AT 26,D
TO
2 TBI-PIL 0-55 КУР ТО GROUND
2 —o—

L HV TRANSFORMER-İLMA SENS ING AND MET ERING |1 συ L A T .

O } PRINTS TO
| MAE av
1 о
om me oe eo «ть 23596- 041 İç
ON SHEET

56 | 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 66
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 ,, | sg | ss | vo | „ ЗМ А0654Е
Lowe 8 «SE
96982 | REV
NO. GENERAL SD ELECTRIC 23596-040
v
Ovd-96S¢2 “ TITCE 3 _| 23596. sm nO 7
HV RECTIFIER AND X-RAY TUBE UNIT
FAST Mao Fon AMX || ALL MODELS
REVISIONS

iB

3TB1-39
24,E

N
NY TPLI С

3TBI-28 3TBI-29
24,F 24,E
7CR2 7CR4
125 KVP 125 КУР =
>” |
X-RAY TUBE
HRT 1.0mm 15°

7CRI 7CR3 “了 一
125 KVP 125 KVP

ANTPL2
7PL2 A =

TO _
3TB!-18 ΤΡΙ Χ5
SEE 27,8
| i
FILAMENT POWER E
SUPPLY CIRCUITS =
SHOWN AT 27,C

TO
3781-12 —|
SEE 26,E 7 TBI-XC |

FP

Ly V RECTIFIER UX - RAY TUB E

= 23596-040
(S8UEO: Locanon i come
on ser 8 mma?
67 | 68 ] 69 | 70 i 기

7-17
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-Il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880
73 75 = 78 20 8! . ，
E
88 on ws
OTE 1 FOR SI COLLINATORS Sita GENERAL GD ELECTRIC | 25 596 7 941 88
lb0-965€2 τος if - 4 ade τ Ses ms

TO 3CRI SLECTRONTO TIMERS joel AY ANO INTERLOCK CIRCUITS

INVERTERS — „UVER hut uno ön AMA son

CHARGER INVERTER INVERTERS | aon M
SEE 9,8 SEE14,B SEE 32,8 BISI app ーーーーーーー | 8) — der etree 一 — ODEL 46 -165600Gi0moms
thru Gi2 ' ーーーー
|,
+ Ay
it 0一
C 一 9一
一 ~~ | — 33 25 ADJUSTVENT PROCEDURE 1
a ων
3J4-17 sb < po | | vi T INVERTER LINC ADJUSTMENT CONNECT DUAL Ch&NNEL S0PE
С å $ CHANNEL TS TOP TERMINAL GF 3C1 NNEL 2 Tü οὐ τῶν
CN 一一 一-一 一 一 TERMINA: GF 301 SCOPE GROUND TO er 11 WITH SCOPE NOT
| : τοι” < EXTERNAL TRIGGER TO 31S1-1.
! "一 | 一 一 , || ELECTA : ei oF GROUNDES fHRU LINE CORC
г 3KI 4- ‘Ss am q
B— 72, 34431 | das 」 T PK > う CLOSE ROTCR BUTTON AND OBSERVE PULSE WIOTH OF FIST |
кTa: 21004 INVERTER PULSE (MAY OCCUR ON EITHER CHANNEL | OR CHANNE 一
ーー | vr i 2, AGJUST 3A4820 FOR FIRST PULSE WIDTH GF 4.0 M ーートー
| RSE L| i 9 FAI, —
a i и -
i _ ο.
А
3A4K22-B i $ 3A4CR27
}

7LC ン 그 ut e Уз 145059 354-27 |

nt F wr ©

| 8151 — g ON | B
3 ΟδΙ5Ι[-5 A
3TBI-19 3A4K36-8
$ jL74,E 344-23 24+2V 2 je a a a _ 2442V 3J4-23 |
т| ?| + $— る e 2 し
LL 551-3| 3394-15 - o | м,“ 30406 ' | | do
3TBI-26 1ΦΑ4ΟΒΙ4 !3AGCRIZ | 3A4CR24 3J4-23 | | ΦΑ4ΚΖΒΣΤΒΙ-Ι
- 4145059 3145059 | kIN5O59 4c σας | | TA 3A4RI6 — 一 č 3
| sE eg S3A4R4 | 120
34-5 znak 27 {δε ATTI /2N697 34442 |
UNITS ABOVE | ' | o
SN 326500 3
(SEPT 75) 7
ITB2 SASRIS ο>aαμ 5
$39925 | S3A4R29 op TO
3J2-21 OF SALI
G . K < © 2.2K 215K 1
<75K
<
S 150K
< o FILAMENT
に 6 ee eee le
3A4RI7

TO 2TBI-2 _ 十 二
VESTES ソノ 34408 S 3A4R26 3A4R28$ So SEMFD

= 24603
68 MFD T a 3A4R21
VANG す 3A4CR33 一
IOK IN5059
ICR3 -
354-35 ||
3 50S!
一 rIN5062 (< POWER ON $—O—4
= LITE Sen 3A4C35
— 6
2
3445R52 レー、 SAS? る 3A4R3|
=
ーー BATE SIR
Зе
_/ 24+2\ 47MF sadede INSO59 SE IN5O59 2100
== <5250 | る>3 3A4RI9
af | 3A4CR59
一 っ 3A4CR38 >8.2K PROCEDURE 7 AT 10X “on IN5059
ELsw IN C6B Т.А LATER UNITS TO 3J2-31 OF
ROTOR POWER ON = _
| 3A4R2O SENSOR AT 24,F
- > INVERTER
3TBI-2 34413 3A4CR44 SYN. ADI ST ]20K |
+ 3A4CR53 3J4-3-
? Г ces
_ 3A4CSI
S3A4R4 3A4R47 2A4C461 3J4-21 = IOMFD 3A4CR55
2 — Te
> 188 ISK ΟΙΜΕ IN4148 $3A4R70
2 27K SIK E
ー C3 < 20 > >
900MFD 3A4CR39 3A4C43 5-21 Soo 0 3700©
1450597 OSMFD (20,F SHEET 28) $ > ーー
SYNC SIGNAL FROM っA4CR48 y
60 HZ INVERTER DRIVER IN4148
3A4CR65
INI767 .
το ro + [6.8 +1№
Al-11 J2-23OF J2-23 0F

So αμ, ει mansa | о | SOME7,8OH SONSA ON„B

, ТО 344-25 | ROTOR FILAMENT a7

IN5059 :> O HZ INVERTER

INVERTE κ na
IO MEDE 一
3JI-7 3J3-| Te
BATTERY- + 33475 HAS 5
3J4-19 3J4-19

| BATTERY | | NVERTER İ INVERTER]

INVERTER | | | FILAMENT AND -
|

POWER SUPPLY DRIVER. | 60-HZ INVERTER SECONDS . ROTOR INTERLOCKS |」

©POWER SUPPLY DELAY POWER SYNCHRONIZATION CIRCUIT EXPOSURE START DELAY READY し ] !
STOP
DELAY
pr

TİG
=

PRINTS TO

MADE BY 1 removers ος oy On 23596- 03!

Sueo | CO ron mar sn мо BB

| 73 | 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 | | 80 | 81 | 8
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-!I X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E |
83 | 84 | 85 86 87 85 BS 30 | 91 | 92. | 93
ONHS (| 43345 NO LNOD . = n
Oba -966¢2 | No GENERAL @ ELECTRIC | 23596-D41
L ““}CONTON SHEET 1(0) seno Y
__ SLIDER
SLIDE IS DRIVENA BYKNC3 OF TRIGGER AND REGULATION CIRCUITS
プー 553 MAS SELECTOR
sinst mane son AMX- il ALL MODELS

MAS —> 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 12 / 20 32 48 80 150 250 ーー

A = | ES” | UNITS BELOW
5S38 13 12 | ° 9 Y 08 o? 96 2 SER. NO. 346320
| | | i | ーー |
TO 3TBI-21 i € 5R24 5R23 benz 5R21 25R20 <5R9 èSRI8 èSRI7 èSRI6 <5RI5 <5RI4 SR 5RI2 る 5RII ESRIO ὁ59 TO 3TBI-20

가 더 그 가다 더더
—
AT 86,C 31.8 L2IK к SL2IK i
2L2IK る 2.49K る 2.49K ら2.49KSSIIK る SIK |
SSIK SIOK ŠIOK SIOK S20K 220K 20K 127K AT 86D 1 ーーーー ゴ

5S3A 13 12 H 0. 9$ | 7 | ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 8.

CONNECT SCOPE ACROSS 2TB1-1 AND 27B1-3. MAKE EXPOSURES
— AT 60-KVP, 100-MAS. ADJUST JAIR4 FOR | 40.01 SECOND

B 5 S 3 TIME SELECTOR ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE9

(Time = MAS) CONNECT SCOPE BETWEEN EMITTER OF 341048 AND 3TBI-11 -一 一
ADJUST 3AIR20 UNTIL 3A1048 BREAKS INTO OSCILLATION
- 1 CO
FROM A STEADY VOLTAGE CONDITION. RECORD VOLTAGE. | 上
3TBI-36 READJUST 3AIR20 TO REDUCE EMITTER VOLTAGE 35 TO 4 OV 一
| O ? AS SHOWN IN W38.

2 3J4-23 34-31 |
3TBI-35 | -
3A R49 -
3J4-29 3TBI- ほ 3J-23 24+ 2V 2 SAIR4I 5 3AIR24
370 | + 中 ? DIK MA OVER! LOAD ㅅㅅ ~一
cl. | 34184 ЗЕ
o—9 3781-21 | SEE ADJUSTMENT duto | | saicr2e +
1 3AICR8
500 > 553B-13 3AIR405
、 77. し sAjfre9 |
ROCEDURE
AT 91.8
NO. 9 5 3AIR21 24+2V 4n
INS060
365
T. 86,F
À IN5059 TIMER ADJUSTMENT
| 47K È Sã 7 1.5K i 31-2 BRN, TO 3CR3
MAS SELECTOR - veer 3AIC33 AT 21,C
3AIK 7 SEE ADJUSTMENT 一 SHOWN AT 82,A 3AICR39 3A1048 + | 47 MFD |
PROCEDURE NO E INSO59 2N2646 3AIR32 N , 3AIC25 X / TO 3CRI-15
— |, AT 92,8 一 S 3AIR6 > ANN ES sk IR2 O +| 47MFD =] YEL
WHT AT 14,8
| 一 一? し 3AIR2 | 3AICR5 553В-2
т $330 3AICR47
C6B / 8.2K ー> 373 3
ŠEČ 313 FRI FOR MA OVERLOAD |
POWER
3K3 3.4 +/- 2 SEC. S Lok $15059 737BI-20 (+ | | 35VRMS CIRCUIT FROM 60-HZ | | |
TIMED OPEN ? 45059 3J ト |7 | \ 并 3AICR45 S3AIR22 60 - HZ INVERTER
一 一 ré ? 3.3K
» 3AIRI6 SAICII IN4148 w38 $BLK _ TO 3CR2
,
— — 3AIC3 3A1Q17
2NI671B Ol MFO 4 3AIRS0 < do SIGNAL PROPORTIONAL
47 MFD Tr <3AIRI2 | 3AICR68 HAIRS A 2 AR 3 ок < т 3J1-35 TO MA AT ITPI 38,E
CE $2.2K WIN5059 ] | |
31-21 5 SAIRIS | | MA OVER LO A D
— 1 '0 341030 3AICIO $ 3AIR46 一
4 MFD 4A MFD + 3AICR3I 9 $ 100
À 1N5059 2 3AIRI9 W34
| 3AICRI4 1 100 |
4 J4-35 311-15 IN5059 |
© ο > 4 TO 3TBI-II SIGNAL THAT SHUT OFF CAPACITORS
| 35 6 ARE CHARGED FROM 3R6
E | 3AICR28 3TBI-3 SEE 40,E
< 3AIR64 068 3AICR35 3AICR36
S 22K O 3J6 - 4 一 3AIR42 IN5059 IN5059 -一
|ピグ VV 혀- © té 3J1-33 gn
2.2K vi 3J-9
- — 341038 < So < 3AIR57 3AIR59 < 3AICR9
47 MFD ο y 47K 3AICR53 47К $ IN5060
— 3TBI-4 TO 3J6-2 | 31.5 145059
8TSI-4 AT 38,C SAIR29S - 려 3A1R27
GRN < SIGNAL FROM 3J3-35 22
34673 TURN ON SIGNAL 346-7 3AICR54 OF 500-HZ INVERTER
INVERTER. SEE IN5059 DRIVER
SE SENSOR |
HAND SWITCH W35 TO 346-6 3A10567 3A1161 -一
F X-RAY
BUTTONSPUSH [s se] dle WAVEFORM W35 BSC | 之
3AIKT-A AT 40,E ‘ 2N69 |3AIC6
3AIC62 NE -76 | | 」
TO 346-1 W36 一-| 3-29
BLK AT 39.C 3A6T5 EXPOSURE STOP SIGNAL
| TO 2CRI SEE 36,E
BTSI-5 | $
3AICR63 y TO 3J6-5 2 3 人7K
一 3TBI-H 3J6-3 IN5059 3J6-3 AT 40,D ]
3U6-Î1
5 | 一
3J4-5 3-7 3J17 LU
34-19 |
Ll

G | -一 一

L EXPOSURE START PULSE TRIGGER

IL |
TIMER
JL STOP
TRIGGER
PULSE |
MA OVERLOAD TRIGGER PULSE
SYNCH
С
SHUTOFF
CHARGE
CAPACITOR
GATE
TORİ rants 10
por | revak |D rl 23596-D41
| ON SHEET İÜ sn wo

83 | 84 | 85 86 87 68 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-II X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E |
83 | _ 84 | 85 | 86 87 | 88 i 89 | 20 | 9! 92 23
6 Ones 01| мо 1-05
133$ | İ key 9 |
19-96662 E GENERAL ELECTRIC | 23596-04 ,
σον ТоомТ Ом 5НЕЕТ SH NO
ーー SLIDER IS OFDRIIVEN BY KNOB OF TRIGGER AND REGULATION CIRCUITS
UNITS WITHOUT и ー TT ーー pasrMaogroR 人AM メー ALL MODELS

A UNI | MAS — 10 20 30 50 8.0 Pv. 20 22 38 Lio 250 ne vision|

A 1.0 AND 1.5 MAS ーー
< — 一 - UNITS SER. NO. 348320
OT la
SELECTION 9 | и 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 2 ANO ABOVE O |
Ÿ Ť ? —$ $? 1
TO 3TBI-21 5RI5 Sem る 5RI3 SSRI? een >SRIO μα 588 <5R7 $586 585 2584 2583 ο5β2 3JI-17 10 3TBI-20
AT 86,C SIIK SIOK SIOK SIOK SZ0K S20K S20K S39.2K S39.2K Fax I27K SI27K る 1I27K ΑΤ 860
— | | | ii i! }! ' mu =

S
= 8 4 3 2 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 8.
CONNECT SCCPE ACROSS 2181-1 AND 2181-3. MAKE EXPOSURES
Е 2 _ AT 60-KVP 100-MAS. ADJUST 3A1R4 FOR I ¿0.01 SECOND
! A Es A 40 64 100 200 300 TIME INTERVAL AS SHOWN IN #37,

B I ME SELECTOR Β
TIME = MAS)
( Е ico m
| 3TBI-36 | | A
IN-LINE ーー 3
圖 SPLICE
2__ 344-23 31-31 | | 一
3TBI-35 | | -
3J4-29 3TBI-I3 30-23 24+ 2V | S3AIRA! =
370 $? の 7 + | S IK
34184 : Se 3TBI-21 | | | ; с

一 -3c5 | 本 INSO53 f pe 427k る ¢ SAIR 59 BRN

<|SIMFO > 86F TIMER ADJUSTMENT | MAS SELECTOR ? 22K 311-217 TO 3CR3
' < ΄ =

3AIK7 SEE ADJUSTMENT —æ< SHOWN AT 82,A 3AICR39 '

JI-25 PROCEDURE HO. 8 | o INSO59 YEL / TO 3CRi-15
p
3AICRS
2 553B-2
3161-20
< 330
TN
3AICR47
CEB SEC
373
3 POWER
373 PRI
FOR MA OVERLOAD |—
TIMED SEC.
3K3 3OPEN <> 34162
1.0К 3A1CRi3 À IN5059 yore! ( > 35VRMS CIRCUIT FROM 60-HZ |
25-C IN5059 | B 60 - HZ INVERTER ©
> > sumos 一 一 SA YEL $ BLK To 3CR2

一 一一3AIC3 A4. вак | Г [мо

| “foi meo 3AicR44 2 3AIR43 SIGNAL PROPORTIONAL
> 47 MFD 7 る 3AIRI2 | 3AICR68 A aras < 3JI-35 TO MA AT ITPI 38,E
22.2K Y INS959 41498 ŞIK
) 3JI-2| S 3AIRI5
<
P- .
io NOT USED | _
— | 4 3AIC30 3AICIO | -一
| 4 MFD A MFD $. 3AICR3I 9||c < =
- A IN5059 3AIT.8 < 3AIRI9
3AICRI4 | 100 |
4 14-35 311-15 15059
©- ο-- 4 @ SIGNAL THAT SHUT OFF CAPACITORS
3TBI-3 ARE CHARGED FROM 3R6
. 3AICR28 SEE 40,E
E
2 3AIR64 C6B 3AICR35 3AICR36 3AICRBO | | E
S$ 22k O3J6- 4 一 3AIR42 IN5059 IN5059 3AICR81 E
< | AAA mi '
一 2.2K o 3ul-9 IN5059 | | 31-33 -一 | 一
| ——
ON GI-H
1 47341038
MFD
$$”3AIR55 る< 47
3AIR57
K JAICR53
3AIRS9
47K
2$ 3AICR9
IN5060
一 3TBI-4 © TO 346-2 BOAROS IN5059
8TSI-4 AT 38,C SAIRZ9 ¢ 31-5 려 3AIR27 a
GRN i < |
34673 TURN ON- SIGNAL 346-7 SAICR54 OFSIGNAL
500-HZFROM
DRIVER SENSOR
3J3-35
INVERTER 22
HAND SWITCH W35 INVERTER SEE IN5059 3A1161 |
WAVEFORM W35 83,C de TO 346-6 ( 3A1Q56 ЗЕЕ 49,0 21060
X-RAY PUSH ds: sel
BUTTONS | “iie 3AIK7-A A AT 40,E 2N697 SOL MFD NE-76 1 |
F
TO 346-1 W36 | | 31-29 F
BLK AT 39,C EXPOSURE STOP SIGNAL -
TO 2CRI SEE 36,E
8TSI-5 る| 3AIR52 $ 3AIR58
3AICR63 1 TO 3J6-5
= 1 ーー

3J6-Î1
Зо å é å | —..
3J4-5 3JI-7
| 3J 1-7 ー
344 -19

L İİ JL ЧЕ | by —
ーーニー

1 SYNCHGATE IL
e

EXPOSURE START PULSE TRIGGERЕ TIMER STOP PULSE

TRIGGER V A OVERLOAD TRIGGER” LSE
SHUTOFF
CHARGE
CAPACITOR]
GATE
し
=
[Mave ov j wee Ser | 23596-D4I
| [ssueo | LOCATION | CONT
ON MEETİO suno 9
83 84 | 85 T 86 | 87 | as | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 1 93

7-21A
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS | AMX-il X-RAY UNIT
1-1880 SM A0654E |
RT TRES] | | GENERAL ELECTRIC a-
0v0-1610£ | | 2 | 3 | 4 5 | W 6 7 8 9 | ve 30191-D40
- "OM ONTAUUOÍ 1 一 一 一 一 1 =
UNLESS OTHERWISE -
SPECIFIED USE 一ΤΗΕ 一 -FOLLOWING:
一一 一 一 一 ~ +ку A τ
TITLE cont ом SHEET 10 SHT NQ 9
APPLIED PRACTICES T ” A SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

|
| 46-2C2600 οπέι το |
|
du
|
し
|
| CONT
30191-D40
ON SHEET 10 SHY NO. 9 FIRST
TRIGGER
MADE FOR AMX-I:
SNO REGULATION ALL ODELS
CIRCUITS
SLIDER IS DRIVEN BY KNOB CF
„7583 MAS SELECTOR
MAS > 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 12, 20 32 18 80 155 250 —
4 > レー
ss38 一 各
1 9 Y 8 7 6 S 4 2 1 UNITS WITH NEW TIMER 一一
i AS 8 © 9 9 ο o 2 BOARD 46-188482-61 |
a - 4 A a e

TO 3TB1-21 SR21 で SR20 5919 < 5818 00 ーー

| R1S
オ SSR14 TREE Sear ese: ог 529 i
C3RZ < i SR? 4< 586 SRS 5
2874 563 し SR2 341-17 7Q 1781-20 |
AT 86,C 21K 49K οκ ATK LOK < < 20K | < 39.2K < 39.2K 4.9K 127K L 1878 127K 127K LS
3J1-19 | S ~ < < < < < 一 AT 86,0 |
1 À т i | Los AA --
|| O| 6 5 6 2 し
< a- 13 12 11 J 6 5 4 3 1 | _
553 > . | | ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 8.
— T SONNECT SCOPE ACROSS 2TB1-1 AND 2TB1-3. MAKE EXPOSURES
MAS 1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10 16 24 46 6+ 100 200 300 AT 60-KVP, 100-HAS. ADJUST 3AIR7 FOR +£0.01 SECOND ーー
= G 3 T I M E S = | E STA R TIME INTERVAL AS SHOWN IN W37 |
D 一 一 一 上一 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 9. 一
MAS * CONNECT SCOPE AS IN PROCEDURE 8. MAKE EXPOSURE AT |
(TIME = O] 60-ΚΝΡ, 1-MAS. ADJUST JAIRY FOR 10 MILLISECONDS |
_ ICO / + 1XTIME INTERVAL.
一
トーーーー

1 3181-36
O ς
O3J1-3 —
IN-LINE |
SPLICE

344-23 341-31 8 B 344-11 | 一 一

2 + + O
3TB1-35 ! | |
i < 381950 > 3R7 Г.
; i < 7ος =
i < 25Y
344-29 2781-13 3J1-23 24V ょ2V c e 3A1R70 し
3 ο ο + 一 一0 一 * WN 391068 JI v3 -一
| TIMER ADJUSTMENT 941-13 | 2-гк 2N3414 SAIR62 SAIC6O || 3
SEE ADJUSTMENT i 1 3A1RS7 < i + — AAA 4 41 一 一 一一 21 BLK 一 一
3A1K13 paça 1 PROCEDURE NO. 8 5 1 22% > ュ 3R1C71 3A1C74 an SCRIO EK 3300PF ТИ |
Е 145059 | AT 92,8 371849 < $ 2.6.1 10 D 1429068 3A1CR66 100
| < ' 4.7K S = 24V z 261864
! 2k
- < 3A1RS
>"
JAR? Se> ο
341-19
3TB1-21 |
3A1CR48 + +
SS38-13 At14B
| SALCRIS ょ3n1CR10 し | 一
3K3 EC. 14505? 14505? 人
TIMED OPEN г HAS SELECTOR < PRIMARY
t SHOWN AT 82,A 371 s-
주 래 166 L SEE —
a B € D E F 8 H 1 J K L N N 49,C-E

pao

.
! J κ | м м
° 3J1-21 q? E 『 5538-2 n
-一
3TB1-20
3J6-4 3J1-17 |
391069 JI
TO 3J6-2 SEE ADJ. QS e 261863 391061 |, ーー 그 Lo, BLK
AT 38.C PROCEDURE ~ 3300PF VI" トーーーー

30189? NO.9 AT | 3A1CR67 100v |

1K 2.8 | 二 1N4149 361865
3AICRSS rt
W CeB D D * SIONAL THAT SHUT O 一 一
36673 TURN ON SIGNAL 36168 $) + CAPACITORS ARE CHARGED
TO 500 7 1700 ^ i FROM 3R6 SE €
EE INVERTER SEE eu NOTES —
35 WAVEFORM W35 50101! UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: し
ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W,5%
¥3AICRSS _
341-33 AND ARE IN OHMS. —
PIO 1345059 3A1CRS4 3AIRSS
3A1R73 本 1NA14e 1K |
TO 356-1 し 301020 2.2K 3AICR3S ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MFD.
AT 39.C <361817 2N1671B < 1N3060 一 一
< 3A1R19 a E E ーー
< 22k 7 7 311652 一 .
| 0.05 し JA1RI6 ——
3A1C18 9
) 3J6-3 3A1C46
ton É
381CR21
145039
|
3A1T22 ©
3A1R23
100
] ο σον ο,
2
SRI Re? o
“ok 3AICR25
Di A1DS34 一一
J4-35 341-15 JA1CR16 F F 2 1N3039 3A1DS |
4 0 © +4
1N5059
ㆍ; 3781
4 8 8
+ + SATCRZ6
ss 291928
3A1032
2N697
一
381631 341-29 qm
| 1
CR37 o H 4 ,
3181-40 SAN Mm JATRST 3a1CR43 | JAICR42 SAICR44 3AICR4SS 0.001
~ è pr

2.2K 145059 31-9 115059 {45039 INSOSP la -—

8TS1-4 22291547 391R24 SIGNAL FROM 3J3-33
+= ° : OF 500 H2 INVERTER ln
GRN E3J1-5 DRIVER SEN
HAND SWITCH W- Fe Г
X-RAY PUSH [|] St 82 Y 36 TO 3J6-6 + + + しーー
BUTTONS | AT 40,E
BLK
3A1R39
IK 7 a3.c
sarka. W36
Ç
ς
4 Å
SHUTOFF CAPACITOR 1 SI

azTs CO | EXPOSURE STOP CHARGE GATE | し ーー

8TS1-S SIGNALTO 2CR1
SEE 36.E REVISIONS PRINTS TO

3TB1-11 SA1CR38 y | IG
i
TO 3J6-5 -
407 -
356-3 АТ 40,0
| | 3046-11 I I
5 (O © È + ©
354-5 3J1-7 3J1-7 J y
344-19
i | VAO, |
| | STOP PULSE -SYNC ~ + πα a +
EXPOSURE START
т PULSE TRIGGER —İ 號 一 一 一 一 TIMER TRIGGER —MA OVERLOAD TRIGGER PULSE GATE— feet ;
Me seEDICAL SYSTEMS ot]
LWAUKEE. WI. 30191-040
_
LOCATIOMICONI ON SHEET 10 sur no. 9

a- 2 | > | * 5 | A 6 | o | 8 | 9 | 10 |
30191-D40
7-21B
 GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS AMX-11 X-RAY UNIT
3-1684 |
SM A0654E 99 t 100 I 101 i 102 | 103 | 104
ο Ες pues | | GENERAL fi ELECTRIC | 23596- D42
ovd-96S¢2 | | "ne MOTOR CONTROL 4 CONT ON SHEET FE TO)

FiRSTMADE FL A AMX || ALL MODELS

REVISIONS

A .

BAI BOARD

ALL COMPONENTS NOT DESIGNATED

ARE PREFIXED BY AN 8Al-.
| on =
+ 和

| | R2
{

| ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 10.

| WITH BATTERY VOLTAGE OF 110-120 VOLTS, CONNECT
8 | OC VOLTMETER ACROSS 8AI-5(+) AND 8AI-6(-).
BLOCK 16" WHEELS OFF GROUND AND MARK TREAD
FOR R.PM. WITH DIRECTION SELECTOR IN FWD. AND | |
THERMAL SWITCHES ο | DRIVE ASSIST NOT DEPRESSED, ADJUST 8AIRIS FOR | | |
OPEN 167°F | CRI 54 十 /一2 RPM. AT MAXIMUM SPEED. VOLTAGE
CLOSE 150°F o ACROSS 8AI-5 AND BAI-6 SHOULD NOT EXCEED
8A2SI 8A2S2 9 1 x 80VDC.
— > o ‘ NOTE: BAIR3! FACTORY ADJUSTED
3T81-33 8AI-4 > 。 | DO NOT ATTEMPT ADJUSTMENT
< o .

8A2R4 8A2R2 - ВА?Н!

]
3k2-c- BAZTSi-Z η < 5n,100W 5n,100W - 10n,100W
— p IN 一4一 人人人人一 一 -一
с | 4 BAZCRI 7 BAZKI 2 R29 cé ーー
8TSI-9 IN50604 103,C © |. ЭК …ㄷ 7
| 25 W 8A2KI-B
^^^
«A
| 8F2 ç BA2TSI-I
APTSI-
BA2R3 95,0 C3| —GFF+ —REV
—

a 5n,100W | ο ο |
| 8 а EMI 9 |

ト 、 C6 DIRECTION| |
i { 6CBI 022 一 SELECTOR | + |
| A + > R30 MFD
| ? 2470n
| -二 4 2W
| 4
| =
| 一 / CRI
1 — IBV
| = IN5355
| =D. R2
4! = R29 3 10K3 “e mei 十
| — MAX. SPEED
| 一 | ADJUST A
| στ ὦνο SEE ADJ PROCEDURE RI5
| = 6S5 LO AT 105,8 20K . +
ELI6 | 一5 ASSIST | o| R23 | 1.9 6154 6LS3
ΒΑΙ-9 6LS4 6LS3 a
A ヤー R9 R IO < R21 W-56 2 6 8K
Es 6CBI 13K 470 χο ή S 6.8K | 1 Q8 652 BUMPER 一
|| $ 02 Q5
MPS 6517 ] C4 |
—>4 MPS
6513 R24 DIRECTION
SELECTOR MICROSWITCHES
ÅL 、 ut R3I
2OKL_ TPS 2N2646 KA | 470
7S OOMFD L, 4 100PF > 09
6C BI
= 25V ACR3 03 ήν ) Q7 2N344| .
i M PS
MPS65I3 2 4 RI2 一 C3
一 ,
マン
|!
538) AAA
IN53

16 V RIT R22 os 6513

7 S 8.2k | 100 PF de | | |
во ] MPS6513
| | |
F | | AS a DELCO
El 8F1 W- う | W -55 DT $4040
[一 C2 _ Lan > RI3 w-52 く R25 $828 OR
NC 1MFD sar q 820 : TIK west W-59
Lg ZNS65!
| $ y ма 010
- ΝΟ R29
6LSI ВА! -| 145059
(CLOSES WHEN HANDLE |
IS DEPRESSED) | | | | |

l MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT | |

S m
PRINTS TC

[MADE BY | APPROVAIS | .,.,,,,. oe 23596- D42

jk | LOCATION) CONT
ON SHEETF mm, 10

aa | 95 | 96 | 97 | 98 | 99 | 100 | 101 102 103 | 104

7-23